Tree Planting Solutions in Hard Boulevard Surfaces: Best Practices Manual

Tree Planting Solutions in Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual Project # A21065 Date February 8, 2013

Recipient City of Toronto

Submitted by DTAH, Lead Consultant ARUP, Engineering James Urban, Urban Trees + Soils Urban Forest Innovations, Arborist

| ARUP | James Urban - Urban Trees + Soils | Urban Forest Innovations Inc.

Consultant Team

Acknowledgments

DTAH Adam Nicklin, Gerardo Paez-Alonso, John Hillier, Clara Kwon, Michelle Lazar, Donna Bridgeman, Karen Honsinger, Elnaz Sanati, Ayako KItta, Johanna Evers, Jacob Mitchell, Bob Allsopp, RenĂŠ Biberstein, David Dennis, Hillary Topps

City of Toronto Parks, Forestry & Recreation Peter Simon, Mark Ventresca, Julia Murnaghan, Mark Mullins City Planning Robert Freedman, Jane Welsh, Sheila Boudreau Toronto Water Patrick Cheung, Carmelo Pompeo Technical Services Mario Goolsarran, Chris Myers, NhatAnh Nguyen, Peter Pilateris, Wai Yeung Transportation Services Andre Rudnicky, Elyze Parker, Susan Samuels, Robert Mays Waterfront Secretariat Chris Ronson Economic Development & Culture Antonella Nicaso

ARUP Harold Sich, Ken Bontius Urban Trees + Soils James Urban Urban Forestry Innovations Philip van Wassenaer, Alex Satel Client - City of Toronto Major Capital Infrastructure Coordination Doodnauth Sharma

Enbridge Gas Rob Milne, Vince Cina Toronto Public Utilities Coordinating Committee (Cogeco Data Services) Patricia Ritchie DeepRoot Canada Mike James Citygreen Jeremy Bailey ACO Steven Tonaj Gro-bark Earthco Soil Mixtures

II

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual

Contents Executive Summary

iii

1. Introduction

1

2. General Principles

3

2.1 Principle 1: More Soil Yields Larger, Healthier Trees

4

2.2 Principle 2: Larger Pavement Openings Yield Larger, Healthier Trees 6

2.3 Principle 3: Integrate Utilities into Root Zones, Increase Soil Volume 9

2.4 Principle 4: Strategic Cost-Efficient Design

11

3. Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

13

3.1 Type-1: Pavement Bridge System

14

3.2 Type-2: Soil Cell System

18

3.3 Type-3: Open Planter System

20

3.4 Hybrid Solutions and Retrofits

21

3.5 Sub-standard Sidewalk Conditions

23

4. Sidewalk Arrangements

25

4.1 Sidewalk with Growing Medium Trench (Types -1A, -1B & -2)

26

4.2 Sidewalk with Open Planter and Low Curb (Type-3)

27

4.3 Sidewalk with Open Planter and Raised Seat Wall (Type-3)

28

4.4 Trees and Overhead Wires

29

5. Details

33

5.1 Tree Opening Surface Options

34

5.2 Tree Protection

36

5.3 Water

38

5.4 Root Zone ID

42

i

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual

6. Horticultural Elements

43

6.1 Nursery Stock Quality

44

6.2 Tree Installation

46

6.3 Tree Maintenance

48

6.4 Tree Species Suitability List

50

6.5 Growing Medium

56

6.6 Tree Preservation

63

7. Demonstration Projects

69

7.1 Toronto Water Utility Access Exercise

70

7.2 Enbridge Gas Lateral Line and Riser Installation

73

7.3 Bloor Street West at Dovercourt Rd. and Concord Ave. Demonstration Project

77

Appendices Appendix A Construction Drawings Appendix B Construction Specifications Appendix C Cost Comparison Appendix D Nashdene Yard Demonstration Project Appendix E Bloor-Dovercourt Demonstration Project

ii

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual

Executive Summary

This manual examines and provides cost-efficient options to reach this goal.

Downtown streetscapes are harsh environments for trees, and many do not survive or never grow to a large canopy size. Large-canopy trees provide enormous climatic, environmental, health, aesthetic and psychological benefits. There is room for considerable improvement in the quality of the urban forest in downtown streetscapes and this report examines how this can be done.

SECTION 3 TYPES SECTION 4 ARRANGEMENTS

The City of Toronto has established a goal to increase both the number and size of its street trees (Toronto Street Trees: Guide to Standard Planting Options, April 2010). The City aims to grow large-canopy trees in hard boulevard surfaces that have a complete 40+ year life span and are 40 cm in diameter at breast height.

3.5m min. sidewalk width

5.7m min. sidewalk width

TYPE 1: Pavement Bridge

TYPE 3: Open Planter

1A Growing Medium Trench

X

TYPE 2: On-Grade Pavement Over Soil Cells

1B X

X

Open Planter with Curb Edge

X

Compatibility between types identified in Section 3 and arrangements identified in Section 4.

Section 1 of this report, the Introduction, defines ‘criteria for success’ for urban tree planting in Toronto, and sets the tone for the manual and its future implementation.

Section 2 provides fundamental principles for growing large trees. At minimum, trees require 20 to 30 m 3 of soil each in order to grow to maturity. In order to achieve this, integration of soil/root zones with utilities is proposed to reach the target soil volume under urban sidewalks.

Larger openings in the pavement also help to increase longevity. Cost savings are achieved by eliminating unnecessary hardware and designing structural concrete to withstand the load of occasional snowploughs and service vehicles, but not firetrucks.

Sections 3 and 4 provide various technical solutions that have been developed as part of this manual. They address both new and retrofit construction and repair techniques to respond to a variety of site-specific requirements such as sidewalk width, public realm condition, and infrastructure arrangement for a range of budgets.

Section 5 evaluates essential material components that are required for successful tree growth in an urban streetscape. These are tree opening area materials such as mulch; flexible plastic mesh bark protectors; passive rainwater harvesting and distribution; and root zone ID markers to prevent construction damage.

iii

Sidewalk trees on Yorkville Ave.

Section 6 offers insightful information to ensure that each planted tree has the best opportunity to thrive.

Horticultural topics such as tree preservation, installation and maintenance, tree species suitability, nursery stock quality and soil specific requirements are discussed.

Lastly, Section 7 documents two demonstration projects where the City of Toronto and consultants field-tested a number of the tree planting construction methods.

A water main break scenario was recreated and a gas lateral and riser were installed through soil cells. In both cases, the soil cells posed no significant hindrance to utility work.

The Appendices include construction drawings, specifications, cost estimates, letters of product availability, responses to City comments and the street tree precedents review.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual

iv

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual

1. Introduction Purpose

Criteria for Success

The purpose of this report is to outline the best practices and technical requirements that are necessary to create healthy growing conditions for trees planted in hard boulevard surfaces within the public right-of-way in Toronto. Specifically, the document addresses how continuous soil trenches can be better implemented in the city to maximize the inherent benefits of tree planting projects, while minimizing costs and other encumbrances.

Toronto is a green city with an extensive canopy cover.

Ask anyone who has enjoyed the view out of a secondstorey window in Riverdale, High Park or any one of its established neighbourhoods.

Background The City of Toronto has made a commitment to planting trees on city streets in order to provide an amenity for pedestrians and beautify the city, as well as to reap the environmental benefits of a healthy urban forest.

This commitment is supported by a variety of policy documents, guidelines, bylaws, and planting detail standards.

Continuous soil trenches are part of the City’s Urban Design Streetscape Manual and have been constructed in the past few years adjacent to private development, as well as public road reconstruction projects. Results from these continuous soil trench projects indicate that the City’s current details add significant costs to road reconstruction budgets and do not provide options for retrofitting areas with existing planting or for projects where only part of the sidewalk is being reconstructed.

Approximately 10.2 million trees make up this green cover in Toronto: 6.1 million (60%) on private property and 4.1 million (40%) on private property. Of the trees on public property, about 600,000 are street trees. These trees often have inadequate soil volume for growth and are crowded out by above- or below-grade utilities.

They struggle to grow and often die and leave a poor impression on visitors to the city’s core.

In order to meet Toronto’s ambition to grow more and larger urban trees, various departments have come together to commission this report to evaluate current methods and how they might be improved.

In doing so, three overarching directives need to be embraced: Solutions need to support large-sized urban trees. olutions must be acceptable to current City of Toronto S standards, and affordable within the current fiscal climate. olutions must be viable from a utility access and S maintenance point of view. They must be designed in a way that it can be realistically maintained.

Prior to the report, the team spent time observing and documenting current City of Toronto standards and those of other municipalities and found that Toronto fares well as a progressive centre for urban tree planting.

It is hoped that this report can continue the good work, pushing the potential to grow better urban trees, while understanding and respecting the ‘real world’ requirements of utility companies and City departments.

Sidewalk trees on Yorkville Ave.

1

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Introduction

The relationship between tree size and soil volume is evident on this section of Bay St., beside City Hall.

2

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

2. General Principles This section provides basic principles for growing large, healthy urban street trees in a cost-effective manner.

The following principles described in this section address these needs:

For trees to thrive, they require soil volume, air and water, protection from disturbances and no physical obstacles to growth. A successful sidewalk requires a safe and durable walking surface that can handle the load of snowploughs and the occasional delivery vehicle without caving in.

2.1 Principle 1: More soil yields larger, healthier trees 2.2 Principle 2: Larger pavement openings yield larger, healthier trees 2.3 Principle 3: Integrating utilities into tree root zones increases soil volume 2.4 Principle 4: Strategic, cost-efficient design yields larger, healthier trees

Treed streetscape on St. George St., University of Toronto St. George campus.

3

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

2.1 Principle 1: More Soil Yields Larger, Healthier Trees Key Recommendations

It is a fact that more lateral soil volume will yield larger, healthier trees.

• Individually-planted trees each need a minimum of 30m 3 of soil (in contrast to the current City standard of 9m 3 of soil per tree).

• A grouping of ≥ 2 trees in a soil bed need a minimum of 20m 3 of soil per tree.

• Adequate soil depth is 1m; greater depth if available is better; minimum soil depth is the depth of the tree’s root ball • Where existing soil resources are available, they should be used.

• An approach that prioritizes total tree canopy size over quantity of trees, should be used.

30-40 m 3 Soil = 66-88 m 2 Canopy

9 m Soil = 19.8 m 2 Canopy 3

Each cubic metre of soil volume will support approximately 2.2m 2 of tree canopy area (canopy area is defined as the area on the ground directly under the canopy). Accommodations must be made laterally, as trees roots run laterally rather than vertically down.

A single, mature tree with a canopy diameter of 4m requires 30m 3 of soil volume. Street trees that share soil resources in a continuous trench or planting bed require 20m 3 of soil volume per tree to achieve a healthy, mature size. In places where especially large, long-lived trees are essential to the streetscape, such as important boulevards and promenades, shared soil volumes of 40m 3 per tree should be provided, if space and budget allow.

Native soil resources may be available in the urban condition. This can offset the volume of new growing medium brought to site to reach the recommended soil volume. Urban trees find soil resources in many places besides the planting soil provided. These can include

3m

9

m

S

m3

it y

rd 0

C

da

-4

3

n ta

30

1m

3m

5.5 m 5.5 m Comparison of the tree height attainable from the soil volume of the current City standard tree detail (covered trench T3-A) to the tree height attainable with recommended target of 30-40 m 3 soil volume.

4

Single, large trees have a significant streetscape impact.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

cracks within the pavement and thin spaces under the pavement; soft soils not properly compacted by the contractor; backfills around utility lines; air spaces or poorly compacted soil along basement walls and the walls of utility structures. There are also many areas in Toronto where remnant native soils exist under the pavement that are accessible to tree roots. In areas where it can be demonstrated that the existing soil can contribute to the required soil volume, these existing soil resources should be counted in the overall soil volume calculation.

Current urban design practices of dense tree spacing do not allow the recommended minimum of 20 to 40m 3 of soil per tree. Because densely-spaced trees with less soil each have smaller canopies and shorter lifespans than widely spaced trees, the design details that accompany this report recommend the latter, so that each tree will achieve 20 to 40m 3 soil volume.

sizable canopies, not precise layout, provide streetscape impact.

Tree canopy size is a better measure of impact than the quantity of trees. In order to grow large, healthy trees, they must be planted at a distance wide enough to allow each tree the recommended soil volume.

As an example, consider an instance where a stretch of sidewalk will support the addition of approximately 80m 3 of planting soil. Spacing trees 6m apart would result in seven trees with just over 11m 3 of soil each and a canopy diameter of 2.8m per tree. On the other hand, spacing four trees approximately 10m apart would achieve a shared volume per tree of 20m 3 and a canopy diameter of 4.6m per tree. With fewer trees and greater soil volume per tree, the difference in tree growth and impact on the streetscape will be significant.

Designers can also adjust the positioning of trees from a perfect grid to irregular spacing in order to avoid growthlimiting conflicts with utilities and street furniture. As any large, mature street tree will immediately illustrate,

6 m spacing

10 m spacing Tighter tree spacing, less soil and smaller canopies on Church St. near its intersection with Yonge St.

5

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

2.2 Principle 2: Larger Pavement Openings Yield Larger, Healthier Trees Key Recommendations • A 1.5m x 1.5m or greater opening is adequate in a sidewalk condition.

• A 1.2m x 1.2m opening should be the absolute minimum size.

• Particular soil-covering materials and practices are preferred for the open area (outlined in Section 5).

Trees are living organisms that need room to grow. Larger tree openings in the pavement provide room for root flare, trunk growth, oxygen exchange and rainwater capture and absorption.

An acceptable compromise between the tree’s needs and the City’s requirements for safe pedestrian areas is a preferred pavement opening size of 1.5m x 1.5m or greater and no less than 1.2m x 1.2m. Where pedestrian and City requirements allow, the tree planting space should be made wider and longer than these measurements and run parallel to the sidewalk direction.

This will significantly increase the health and longevity of the trees.

The current City street tree practice provides small root-ball-size openings to minimize trip hazards for pedestrians. Maximizing walking space and allowing pedestrians to walk right up to the tree trunk takes priority over street tree health and longevity. These openings do not allow for trunk growth and provide little opportunity to receive rain water. Trees struggle and die

Inadequate tree opening with priority placed on pedestrian traffic at King St. W. and York St.

6

Large tree openings secure more water, oxygen and unobstructed growing medium for the tree to develop.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

in these conditions. Next to inadequate soil volume, small pavement openings are the greatest cause of tree decline or poor growth.

The rationale for the 1.5m x 1.5m tree opening recommendation is derived from the following six considerations:

1) Room for root ball and planting: The typical root ball diameter for a 75mm caliper tree is 0.75m. To get this into the ground, an additional 0.3m is needed on each side of it.

2) Room for water infiltration: Trees need regular watering during the first few years after planting. To recover from transplant shock, water is required not just for the root ball soil but also the soil in the rest of the planting space. A small pavement opening makes it very difficult for water to infiltrate the entire planting space. A larger pavement opening for the tree allows water to more easily infiltrate the entire soil volume.

3) Room for air exchange: Trees also need soil aeration. The greater the surface area between the air and the soil, the easier it is for air to circulate into the soil. It is critical for newly-planted trees to send out roots quickly into the soil to replace lost roots. Many cities have resolved that a 1.2m x 1.2m planting space that provides about 0.25m of space around the tree is sufficient. Outcomes achieved in these tight conditions, compared to larger planting areas, have shown that more space is imperative for rapid establishment. While there is no absolute minimum or even an optimal minimum in the industry, a larger opening is simply better. City safety and maintenance concerns must be better balanced with the needs of trees.

Tree outgrowing its opening at the corner of Cumberland St. and Bellair St.

4) Room for root collar development: Some of the first roots that emerge from the root ball develop into the tree’s structural root system. These roots ensure that the tree stands upright and remains firmly in the ground.

They run laterally away from the trunk. Ideally, paving would be at least 2m away from the trunk so that these structural roots are firmly established. This would require a large tree opening in the pavement and would consume more sidewalk width than is available on most city streets. A compromise would be to run the planting space

7

Unmanaged precast tree cover on Spadina Ave. now poses a trip hazard.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

parallel to the sidewalk alignment. The tree can adapt and develop an asymmetrical structural root collar which, would still be adequate for long-term health and growth.

5) Room for trunk flare growth: At the finished grade, the trunk subdivides into a number of structural roots that run perpendicularly away from it. The tree transfers vertical stress loads horizontally outwards and develops large amounts of wood in this area, which causes the trunk flare. This is analogous to a structural engineer adding more steel or reinforcing at a similar stress joint in a structure. The trunk flare is typically up to three times the diameter of the trunk, as measured 1 m above the ground. Any obstruction of the developing trunk flare will cause significant problems for the future growth of the tree. Trees growing in 20m 3 (grouped trees) or 30m 3 (individual trees) of soil would be expected to grow to at least a 0.4 to 0.5m trunk diameter, with a 1.2 to 1.5m diameter trunk flare. This is in addition to any expansion needed for the root collar. To fully accommodate this growth, planting spaces wider than a typical sidewalk would ideally be made available. However, because this is unrealistic in an urban setting, the larger the planting space that can be provided, the better. This dynamic zone requires a surface treatment that accommodates the change from soil to wood over a 20- to 30-year period, while not posing a trip hazard. Recommended materials are discussed in Section 5 of this report.

Tree at the corner of Queen St. W. and Northcote Ave. Note the large trunk flare in relation to trunk size.

6) Room for maintenance: When the tree dies, the stump, all the wood in the trunk flare, and much of the wood in the root collar will require removal to make room for a new tree. The City of Toronto typically uses a hydro vac to remove the soil. The stump is then cut out of the ground. These machines need space to operate safely and effectively. The cutting blade can be damaged if it hits the adjacent paving, if it is located too close to the tree. A larger tree opening makes this work easier.

Trunk flare development is directly linked to the growth of the tree.

8

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

2.3 Principle 3: Integrate Utilities into Root Zones, Increase Soil Volume Key Recommendations • Utilities should be permitted to run through tree root and soil zones.

• Existing root ball setbacks should be maintained.

• New standard street tree details are proposed to allow for easy utility maintenance and repair.

• New standard street tree details are proposed to accommodate a range of utility scenarios.

Vertical Zoning

Current standard practice for utilities and tree placement restricts allowable soil volumes for tree root zones.

‘Horizontal zoning’ of utilities and tree zones is practiced where trees must be horizontally set back away from utilities above and below finished grade. Utilities and trees are not permitted to overlap, greatly reducing the area into which tree roots can spread.

In order to attain the soil volumes recommended for healthy, mature, long-lived street trees, utilities should be permitted within tree root zones. Utilities can be combined with the area of soil volume below the sidewalk. This approach might be referred to as ‘vertical zoning,’ allowing the root zone to be above or even in the same space as the utilities.

Current standard setbacks for root balls should largely remain unchanged. The latest Enbridge Gas standards allow for root balls on top of main and lateral gas lines, except within a 2m radius of main and lateral intersections.

GAS LATERAL

Integrating utilities within the root zone requires the acceptance and support of utility stakeholders. This new standard asks utility companies to become comfortable in accessing utilities through a root zone, whether the sidewalk is a structural concrete slab or supported by soil cells.

No root balls

Proposed tree trench can be combined with utilities corridor when necessary and where possible have a vertical zoning.

Horizontal Zoning

Root Ball

GAS MAIN

2m us di ra

Root Ball

No root balls

Root Ball

Existing tree planting standard emphasizes the separation of utilities and root zone

9

Latest Enbridge Gas standard: No root ball above intersection of main and lateral gas lines and within 2m of this intersection. Root ball can be placed above main and lateral lines outside of the 2m radial clearance zone

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

The roots of the tree, including mature ones, taper rapidly beyond 1 m from the trunk, making cutting through or breaking the roots fairly simple–either in open soil or in soil cells. In fact, most utility companies are proficient in working close to root zones in the many pre-War single family home neighbourhoods around Toronto, where front yard street trees grow to considerable sizes.

Section 3 of this report outlines proposed new City standards for urban street tree planting in hard boulevard surfaces. Each one has unique implications for access to utilities. They are explained in more detail in that section, along with detailed instructions for utility access and sidewalk repair.

All tree planting systems proposed in this report are designed to allow easy and efficient restoration of the sidewalk to the original state after utility repair below grade. Three types of pavement construction are proposed: Type 1, a ‘pavement bridge system,’ where the pavement spans from one support to another; Type 2, a ‘soil cell system’; and, Type 3, an ‘open planter system.’

Type 1: Pavement Bridge System

Poured in place reinforced concrete paving slab

Precast concrete panel under unit paving Type 2: Soil Cell System

The pavement bridge system requires immediate repair or replacement of the structural bridge to re-establish a safe walking surface.

The soil cell system can be repaired with a two-stage process if desired. This is due to the pavement surface itself not being required as structure. Pavement could be a slab-on-grade or unit paving over granular base. The rigidity comes from the soil cell system, which would require replacing prior to finishing the surface repair.

Unit paving over soil cells

The open planter system offers fairly free access to any utilities within the root zone. Some repairs to retaining walls or curbs around the planting zone may be required.

All standards proposed in this report are designed with maintenance access and repair in mind.

Poured in place concrete paving over soil cells Type 3: Open Planter System

10

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

2.4 Principle 4: Strategic Cost-Efficient Design Key Recommendations • Use the open planter system where space permits.

• Use fewer components.

• Assume structural sidewalk loads for mid-size service vehicles, but not firetrucks.

• Invest in fewer trees per soil volume to increase the potential for each to reach maturity.

The challenge to design new City of Toronto street tree standards was two-fold: to both improve tree growth potential and to reduce costs. While the current City of Toronto standards are very progressive for North America in many ways, their soil volume yield is too low.

To provide the desired 20 to 30m 3 of soil to grow trees to maturity, the design of hard boulevard surfaces requires a structural support to allow the sidewalk to span over a non-compacted soil zone. The area of structural pavement in the proposed details is almost double that of

Precast tree covers at Spadina Ave. in conflict with trunk flare.

Unmanaged tree guard at Park Rd. and Church St. cutting into tree trunk.

11

Unmanaged tree grate at Queens Quay Blvd. is now a trip hazard.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

the current City details, which provide only 10 to 12m 3 of soil per tree.

The majority of the costs of the new details lie in this structural system, running significantly over and above those of a non-structural sidewalk. However, in order to provide adequate soil volume for mature tree growth, a structural sidewalk is required. This increase in cost is therefore unavoidable, but can be offset by other savings.

The proposed details provide a range of options for a range of budgets and site conditions, while providing the 20 to 30 m 3 of soil required to grow trees to maturity.

Where possible, reductions in material, components, structural load and trees are recommended as follows:

repair might be necessary, but it seems prudent not to waste money in over-designing. To upgrade the sidewalk details to withstand fire truck loading would typically be an upcharge of 10 to 20% of capital cost–a considerable expense when considered city-wide.

4) Fewer but healthier trees: This report makes a case for quality versus quantity of trees (discussed in section 2.1).Following this principle, further savings can be made.

Although the volume of soil being made available may be the same, a reduction of the number of trees planted will improve tree health and size, while reducing costs. This is achieved by cutting down on the number of tree openings and by reduced labour associated with planting. Most importantly, growing larger, longer-lasting trees which do not need to be replaced as often cuts down on long-term replacement costs.

1) The open planter system: The open planter system has the least amount of concrete and requires no structural support system. Where sidewalk widths are great enough, it is the most cost effective approach for planting in urban conditions. Successful installations can be found on Dundas St. E. near Regent Park, as well as by the Market St. condominiums, south of St. Lawrence Market. Planters can be aligned near the curb or at the inside of the sidewalk, by the building frontage. Adequate pedestrian clearways should be provided for both options. If the overall tree planting implementation budget decreases, then the City will have to consider this approach in an growing number of situations.

2) Fewer components: Where there is not adequate sidewalk width to accommodate the open planter system, the next step is to reduce the number of components required. The priority should always be placed on budgeting for and providing the recommended minimum soil volume.

Any extra budget can be spent on opening interfaces such as tree grates or guards. While guards and grates provide additional pedestrian area and prevent soil compaction, they may also become an encumbrance once the tree starts to take on girth or if it needs replacing.

3) Less Load: Details included in this report are engineered to support the load of sidewalk ploughs and mid-size service vehicles. Currently, it is the policy of the Toronto Fire Services to not drive on a sidewalk or put down an outrigger unless it is part of a dedicated fire route. In the rare event that the sidewalk load is exceeded due to misuse, some

12

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / General Principles

3. Construction Methods & Repair Regimes Three different systems for tree planting in sidewalks are laid out in this section. They form the basis for the proposed City of Toronto tree planting details that accompany this report in the Appendices. In addition, this section makes recommendations for hybrid solutions and retrofits and dealing with sub-standard sidewalk conditions.

3.1 Type-1: Pavement bridge system: A structural pavement surface or subsurface spans between supporting ends over the growing medium trench.

Reinforced precast and cast-in-place concrete panels provide the ‘bridge’. Refer to the T-1A and T-1B Construction Drawings in Appendix A. 3.1 Type 1: Pavement bridge system

3.2 Type-2: Soil cells system: Modular rigid soil cells support a pavement system above the growing medium.

The pavement surface and base can be built directly on top of the hard deck of the soil cells. Refer to T-2 Construction Drawings in Appendix A. .3 Type-3: Open planter system: There is no paving 3 around the tree base. Where there is space for this system on the sidewalk, it is the most cost-efficient option available for growing large urban trees. Refer to T-3 Construction Drawings in Appendix A. 3.4 Hybrid solution and retrofits: The street is not rebuilt wholesale, just one or two trees in a block may be affected.

3.2 Type 2: Soil cells system

3.5 Sub-standard sidewalk conditions: Conditions where the existing space or utility constraints are such that the standards advocated in this report are not achievable.

Note: In the following descriptions for utility compatibility with various construction methods, review is based upon the general feasibility of working with such utilities and repairs. Ultimately, individual utility companies and City departments will have to reach an agreement for the access and repair of the various conditions generated, and the responsibility thereof. The recommendations in this report are intended to provide a framework for these policy decisions to be made.

13

3.3 Type 3: Open planter system

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

3.1 Type-1: Pavement Bridge System The ‘bridge’ is the simplest concept of continuous hard pavement surface over the root zone. Two bridge options have been designed: reinforced cast-in-place concrete panels (Type-1A) and precast panels (Type-1B). Soil cells can also be used to support the panels.

Type-1A: Cast-in-place structural concrete panel ‘bridge’ Construction A concrete slab is cast in place and spans the root and soil zone and around the tree opening. The concrete requires reinforcement. See S-1 Construction Drawing in Appendix A). The structural concrete slab rests on the back saddle of the curb at the roadside and a grade beam (concrete shoulder) at the back of the sidewalk.

Soil is backfilled prior to pouring the structural slab using biodegradable foam board on top of the soil as the concrete form. See T-1A Construction Drawings in Appendix A.

below. The slab can also be core drilled at corners and hooks inserted to lift it out. To avoid core drilling into internal reinforcing, the reinforcing bars should be located by conventional scanning prior to core drilling.

Utility is accessed by excavation of planting soil or granular.

Repair If the concrete slab must be broken open to access the utility, the slab must be repoured with reinforcing to reinstate it as a walkable surface. In this case, a twostage repair is not possible.

If the slab is core drilled and lifted out, it could be replaced after utility work, the core drill holes grouted and the inevitable unevenness between the replaced slab and existing condition feathered smooth with asphalt.

In this case, a two-stage repair is possible, but not recommended.

Recommended compatible utilities

Utility access The slab must be broken open in order to access utilities

Recommended compatible utilities are those that are generally only accessed in planned repairs, i.e. unlikely

Type 1A -Cast-in-place structural concrete panel ‘bridge’

14

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

to fail in an emergency situation, except by damage via other utility works in the area: • • • •

New generation storm line (concrete) New generation sanitary line (concrete) Concrete-encased hydro duct, combined data District energy

Surface finish The concrete surface of the structural slab provides the finished sidewalk surface when poured in place. This could be used as a base for unit paving. The precast option is easier for repair work. See next section on Type-1B.

Not generally recommended:

Pros and Cons

• Pressurized water main • Gas (main or lateral) • Bare conduit (street lighting, telephone, etc.)

The cast-in-place structural concrete panel ‘bridge’ is fairly cost-effective as it does not need to be covered with unit paving to provide a finished surface. Options for utility access and pavement repair are limited, though.

Utility access, step 1

Utility access, step 3

Utility access, step 2

Utility access, step 4

15

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

Type-1B: Precast structural concrete panel ‘bridge’

is accessed via excavation of planting soil / granular below.

Construction Repair A precast structural concrete panel forms the base for unit paving. See T-1B and S-2 Construction Drawings in Appendix A. The panel spans between the back saddle of the curb at the roadside, and a grade beam (concrete shoulder) at the back of the sidewalk. Soil is backfilled prior to placing the precast structural slab. Once the slab is in place, filter fabric is laid down over the precast panels in order to prevent migration of fines. Setting bed and unit pavers are installed on top.

After utility is backfilled with granular to underside of root zone, planting soil is backfilled and precast concrete slab is laid. Filter fabric is laid back on top of the precast panels. When a one-stage planned repair is possible, unit pavers should be replaced. When this is not possible, the finish surface could be replaced with asphalt until permanent repair. This is not recommended under normal circumstances.

Utility access

Recommended utilities compatible with root zone

Unit pavers are removed and set aside. In an emergency situation where a two-stage repair is absolutely necessary and the crew is not capable of replacing unit paving, the unit pavers would be removed from site for future installation. Filter fabric is cut and peeled back, precast concrete panel is lifted out and set aside. Utility

This system is generally compatible with utilities listed below since the panels can be lifted out. Procedures / agreements would need to be negotiated in order to facilitate the additional scope of the panel removal / replacement:

Type 1B - Precast structural concrete panel ‘bridge’

16

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

• • • • • • •

New generation storm line (concrete) New generation sanitary line (concrete) Concrete-encased hydro duct, combined data District energy Pressurized water main Gas (main or lateral) Bare conduit (street lighting, telephone, etc.)

Surface finish Since the precast panels are designed with notches as lifting points, and would not be reliably flush to each other due to on-site construction tolerances, a surface finish of unit paving is required to be installed on top.

Pros / cons Two pavement systems are required: the precast concrete base and unit paving finished surface. This system is fairly efficient for dismantling and repairing and revising components.

Utility access, step 1

Utility access, step 2

17

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

3.2 Type-2: Soil Cell System On-grade pavement over soil cells allows for traditional pavement on-grade on top of the soil cell assembly and has been used in a number of pilot projects in Toronto and other North American cities. This system requires utility companies and City agencies to become comfortable with the concept of a modular support system, and will require a new protocol to include removal and replacement of the soil cells.

Construction Drawings T-2 in Appendix A provides details on this system.

Construction Space allotted for root zone and foundation are excavated out, and a compacted granular base is installed for the soil cells. Soil cells are installed per manufacturer’s instructions. The pavement system is installed with granular base above the soil cells. The new paving can be installed in a similar way to any on-grade pavement system.

Utility access Where there is concrete, the pavement is sawcut. Where there is unit paving, the pavers are removed. Filter fabric is peeled back, and soil cells are removed and set aside.

In frozen conditions, the soil cells may be removed forcibly with an excavator, requiring them to be replaced with new soil cells prior to repairing surface paving.

Once soil cells are removed, the utility is accessed via excavation of planting soil or granular below.

Repair After the utility is backfilled with granular to the underside of the root zone and compacted, soil cells are reinstalled per manufacturer’s instructions. Filter fabric is laid down on top of replaced soil cells, then pavement system is made good either temporarily or permanently.

Recommended utilities compatible with root zone On-grade pavement over soil cells is generally compatible with utilities below the root zone, ideally where frequent access is not anticipated. Some shallower utilities may be compatible for placement within root zone / soil cell zone depending on agreement with the utility company concerned such as gas or hydro laterals.

• • • • • • • •

Utilities below root zones: New generation storm line (concrete) New generation sanitary line (concrete) Concrete-encased hydro duct, combined data District energy Pressurized water main Gas (main or lateral) Bare conduit (street lighting, telephone, etc.)

Type 2: On-grade pavement over soil cells

18

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

Surface finish Since the structural support is provided by the soil cells, the pavement system can be any type or finish such as concrete or unit paving over concrete.

Pros / cons If the work crew is comfortable removing and replacing soil cells, the access and repair procedure is similar to current practices. The pavement system is equivalent to an on-grade construction. It can be repaired as a permanent repair or a temporary two-stage repair.

Utility access, step 1

Utility access with pavers, step 1

Utility access, step 2

Utility access with pavers, step 2

Utility access, step 3

19

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

3.3 Type-3: Open Planter System The open planter is the simplest and most cost efficient way to plant a tree in urban conditions, though it requires the greatest sidewalk space. The planter can be adjacent to the curb or at the back of the sidewalk adjacent to the building frontage, Currently this system is not a primary approach to sidewalk planting due to spatial concerns; however, it will inevitably need to be a more commonly used standard if overall costs are to be controlled while delivering better trees. See Construction Drawings T-3 in Appendix A for detail drawings.

Construction An open planter is composed of a curb or low seat wall.

The pavement system is built independently, abutting the open planter. In some instances the edging curb or low wall of the open planter may need replacing if the utility straddles them.

soil is replaced.

Recommended utilities compatible with root zone The open planter is generally compatible with utilities below the root zone, since there are no encumbrances.

Utility access should be through non-compacted soil.

Utilities below root zones: • All utilities that would be accessible below a softscape area, can be accessed through the open planter. Usual offsets from tree root ball itself to utility lines should still be respected.

Surface finish The pavement system is independent of the open planter, and can therefore be any surface treatment.

Utility access Pros / cons An area of non-compacted soil is excavated to expose the utility to be repaired below the root zone. In some instances planting material will require removal.

Repair

The open planter is the simplest construction and the most cost effective way of delivering a good urban tree planting condition. It only suits sidewalks where there is sidewalk width for it.

The repaired utility is backfilled and compacted; planting

8.00m

Type 3: Open planter system

20

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

3.4 Hybrid Solutions and Retrofits To implement the pavement bridge or soil cell system, it is assumed that the entire sidewalk is going to be reconstructed for an entire block. An example would be the utility reconstruction of a street revitalization project.

In many instances, however, funding is made available for minor street alterations, often working in conjunction with a street’s Business Improvement Area (BIA) to make cosmetic improvements to the street. Upgrades can be made to existing tree conditions or to the planting conditions for tree replacements.

The following is a guide for minor street upgrades to improve growing conditions of street trees: Consider an open planter The most cost effective way to improve growing conditions is to introduce an open planter condition.

This may be as simple as enlarging the hole around an existing tree. This can be done on an individual tree by tree basis. In a retrofit situation where it is not feasible to greatly improve below ground soil volume, an enlargement of the planting hole is the best way to make a tangible improvement. A tree opening of 1.2m minimum (1.5m ideal) will make a great impact to a tree’s health.

Hybrid system: suspended slab on soil cells

Add soil cells Combining soil cells to the pavement bridge and open planter systems is another option when existing utilities are in place. As part of this study, a street retrofit ‘hybrid’ system was designed to improve street tree growing conditions on Bloor Street at Dovercourt Road. In this instance, soil cells were used in conjunction with a precast slab in order to maximize the soil volume in a tight urban street while working around an existing gas main line.

Take advantage of existing good soil Older streets in the city that are slated for improvements may have existing soil conditions that are favourable for tree growth. You can often get an indication of this by observing the condition of existing street trees nearby. Designers and engineers can also look for other opportunities to take advantage of nearby soil resources

21

Hybrid system: narrow planter combined with soil cells

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

in, or even outside of the right of way. This might be an area of open garden or parkland, that can be linked to the soil volume around an exiting or proposed tree by installing soil cells or a root path. A root path is a small (150-300mm diameter) sub grade tunnel of noncompacted soil that can give a tree roots access to large areas of adjacent soil. They are small enough in size to not affect the structural stability of the pavement system.

Take caution around existing utilities Where pavement is to be removed adjacent to a single, existing or proposed tree, a pavement support system such as soil cells or structural slab can be installed to introduce more uncompacted soil volume. It is generally not recommended to install a structural slab or soil cell system over a legacy utility, such as a clay or brick storm or sewer line. Most utilities built from the 1970’s onwards are fairly robust and stable.

Possible retrofit for existing trees: install larger open planter where conditions are favourable

22

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

3.5 Sub-standard Sidewalk Conditions Inevitably, there will be situations where the best intentions of this report cannot be met. Two possible reasons are: Emergency repair of legacy installation In the instance where an emergency repair is required in the vicinity of a ‘legacy’ or older tree planting installation, it may not always be possible to make improvements without delaying the repair. In this instance, the utility company or City division should notify the Urban Forestry Department that they are dealing with an emergency repair in a legacy tree planting condition. This gives the Urban Forestry Department an opportunity to inspect the site and make suggestions for modest improvements, or to confirm proceeding with a repair to match the legacy (existing condition).

Other physical constraints The physical constraints of the surface or below-grade configuration may be such that the standards in this report are not achievable. In a planned repair or street rebuild/improvement, there will be time to consult with the Urban Forestry Department to coordinate an understanding of existing conditions and to agree on an approach that best meets the guidelines given the constraints.

23

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Construction Methods & Repair Regimes

Dearborn Parkway, Chicago

24

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

4. Sidewalk Arrangements Each tree planting system described in Section 3 makes different spatial demands on the streetscape. One system will work better than another, depending on the particular conditions of the streetscape in question.

The three sidewalk arrangements discussed are:

The recommendations in this section are intended for use with the most recent City of Toronto Urban Design Streetscape Manual and to be compatible with the selected surface treatment for individual projects as desired by the City.

4.2. Sidewalk with open planter and low curb: A 14-m-long open trench framed by a sidewalk.

The only recommended alteration to surface detailing is where it may have an effect on soil volume in narrow sidewalks. Widths are calculated using the recommended minimum pedestrian clearway of 2.1m from the City of Toronto’s Vibrant Streets Guidelines. In retrofit or substandard sidewalk conditions, this can be reduced to 1.7m clear, as per City guidelines.

Tree planting on one side of the street: No overhead wires or other major underground restriction.

25

4.1 Sidewalk with growing medium trench: A covered trench with a series of openings.

4.3 Open planter with raised seat wall: A similarly long trench framed by a low wall instead of a curb, allowing it to be narrower.

Additionally, ground-level arrangement solutions are discussed with regards to: 4.4 Trees and overhead wires: Certain types of wires can share space with tree foliage, while others must be avoided for safety reasons. To prevent damage to trees by excessive pruning, care should be taken in where trees are planted relative to overhead wires.

No tree planting or small tree planting recommended on any sidewalk where major overhead-wire installation is aligned with the tree planting zone

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

4.1 Sidewalk with Growing Medium Trench (Types -1A, -1B & -2) This is the most spatially efficient arrangement, requiring as little as 3.5 m of sidewalk width. It is also expensive, whether using reinforced concrete or soil cells.

Examples of streets with minimum sidewalk width suitable for growing medium trenches

In its tightest configuration, the tree opening is restricted to 1.2m wide and directly abuts the curb. In wider sidewalks of 4.4m and up, a decorative paving band can be used and the optimum tree opening dimension of 1.5m x 1.5m can be achieved.

Dundas St. W., west of High Park Ave.

Bay St., north of Yorkville Ave.

Decorative Paving Band Pedestrian clearway - Recommended minimum 2.1m

Tree spacing recommended 10.0m

26

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

Minimum Sidewalk to implement proposed tree planting details: 3.5m

Bloor St. W. west of Ossington Ave.

Tree opening recommended 1.5m, minimum 1.2m

Where underground utilities require atypical arrangements, soil cells can be added to maximize growing conditions and soil volume.

Decorative Paving Band not included in minimum sidewalk dimension

Tree spacing should be a minimum of 10m on centre along the curb line.

4.2 Sidewalk with Open Planter and Low Curb (Type-3) This configuration requires more room on the sidewalk than the growing medium trench systems, with more of the sidewalk must be made available for open soil volume. It is the most cost-effective option and due to the large volumes of soil with full exposure to air, it will likely yield the best results. This planting strategy has been used to good effect on Jarvis St. adjacent to the Market condominiums, which is presently showing good indications of tree establishment.

The sidewalk requirement is 5.7m in width. For this reason, this configuration’s use is probably limited to major avenues and new developments. Designers might also consider accommodating the planters on one side of the street with no trees on the other (and a tighter, functional sidewalk). This way, the City benefits from one row of outstanding trees and canopy, rather than two rows of substandard trees.

Examples of streets with optimum sidewalk width for open planters adjacent to curbs

Bay St., south of Lakeshore Blvd.

Tree spacing recommended 10.0m Open planter 14m wide with 0.2 wide curbs. Total width 14.8m Tree spacing recommended 10.0m

6.0m

27

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

Minimum Sidewalk to implement proposed tree planting details: 5.7m

Decorative Paving Band minimum 0.8m

Manitoba St., east of Grand Ave., Etobicoke.

Pedestrian clearway Recommended minimum 2.1m

Open planter 2.4m wide with 0.2m wide curbs.

Total width 2.8m

Planters should be 14m long, plus the width of the surrounding curb. Each planter accommodates two trees, allowing the benefits of shared soil volume. Between planters is a 6m space either for pedestrian circulation or bike parking. Tree planting is still a minimum 10m on centre, both within the planters and from one to the next.

4.3 Sidewalk with Open Planter and Raised Seat Wall (Type-3) In this system, the open planter is framed by a seat wall rather than a curb, allowing it to be narrower, while supporting the same volume of soil. It could be placed at the back of the sidewalk or adjacent to the curb. The required minimum width of sidewalk is 6.6m. Where the circulation space is adjacent to the roadway, the City should consider reducing the clearway dimension to 1.7m, which would decrease the overall sidewalk width requirement to 5.2m.

Examples of streets with optimum sidewalk width for open planters adjacent to buildings

This kind of planter can be seen adjacent to the Regent Park Redevelopment along Dundas St. E. near Parliament St. These planters are cost effective, support great trees, and provide shaded street seating.

Bay St., north of Dundas St. W.

Parliament St., north of Dundas St. E.

Bay St., north of Front St. W.

28

6.0 m

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

Minimum Sidewalk width to implement proposed tree planting details: 6.6m

Tree spacing recommended 10.0 m

min. 1.0 m min. 2.5 m

Open planter 2.0m wide with 0.2 wide curbs. Total width 2.4 m

Pedestrian clearway, recommended minimum 2.1 m Decorative Paving Band

Tree spacing recommended 10.0 m Open planter 14.0 m wide with 0.2 m wide curbs. Total width 14.8 m

4.4 Trees and Overhead Wires Tree canopies and overhead utility wires often conflict.

It is important, however, to balance both utility and tree requirements. A city that resolves all conflicts in favour of utility lines is a city that will have a greatly reduced tree canopy. Cities can strike a balance between utility needs, reliability of service, and the frequency and type of tree and branch management. Type of tree and the tree location relative to the line alignment and pole height also play a role in this conflict resolution.

High-placed wires are primary distribution and transmission power lines, which carry high voltage power and are typically non-insulated bare conductors.

There is also a type of super insulated electric wire that is occasionally used in the Toronto area that can come much closer to tree limbs. Lower voltage distribution wires and individual building connections require less stand off distances and are typically lower to the ground.

Telephone and other communications

Just as not all trees are the same, not all utility wires are the same. Each type and class of utility has different needs and function in close proximity to trees. It is important that these differences be factored into each decision on how close trees and wires can be placed together.

Communication wires require less standoff, due to the relatively low voltage of wire in these lines.

Communication wires are typically the lowest set of wires on the utility pole. They are often seen running through existing tree canopy rather than having the canopy pruned around these wires.

Hydro Tree height, overhead wires and streetscape quality Hydro distribution lines have specific requirements for standoff distances to tree branches. The City of Toronto defers to the guidelines published by Ontario’s Electrical Safety Authority (ESA) in the document titled Planting Under or Around Powerlines & Electrical Equipment. To avoid tree contact with overhead wires, the guidelines designate Low, Medium and Tall Zones. The Low Zone is the area under the power lines and within 4.5 m of the line where trees or shrubs should have a maximum 4.5 m height. In the Medium Zone, between the Low Zone and 7.6 m from the power line, maximum mature height of trees should be 7.6 m. Beyond this zone is the Tall Zone, greater than 7.6 m away from the power line, where tree height is not a concern. There is also a Base Zone that is defined around hydro poles where trees/shrubs should not be planted within 3.0 m of a pole. The problem with the ESA is that the Low Zone would apply to many street tree locations. In order to create a strong urban canopy, some modification to this zone is needed.

It is important that high voltage electric lines not come in contact with tree branches and that tree branches not be in position where a branch loss during a storm may fall on a wire. The higher the load in the line the greater the standoff between the wire and tree limbs. Fortunately it is typical that the higher the load in the wire, the higher the wire is placed on the pole.

29

The ESA guidelines for tree planting near hydro power lines permit trees to be planted under hydro lines but only small trees less than 4.5 m height at maturity. Urban streetscapes often have sidewalk widths of 4.5 m or less and would thus be limited to small trees. This is not in line with the goal of this study for large, mature street trees.

The City and the ESA should revisit how large street trees can be grown safely around hydro infrastructure.

Small trees not only fail to contribute significantly to the benefits of the urban tree canopy, but the lower height of the branches and canopy cause their own conflicts with other parts of a functioning urban streetscape.

Small trees provide few of the benefits desired in an urban streetscape. They do not cool the urban heat island nearly as well as large trees, do not capture or treat rain water, and do not create a sense of place. The USDA Forest Service reports that large stature trees provide over four times the net community benefits of small stature trees (benefits minus cost). It is very difficult to prune a small tree and maintain a pleasing shape while reducing branch conflicts with required pedestrian and vehicular clearances. Low canopies significantly reduce sight distances of shop signs. They are never able to reach over the street to shade roadway paving. In addition to the obvious cooling and rainwater catchment benefits, trees shading the roadway surface have been

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

shown to cause significant increase in the life expectancy of the pavement.

Except for with very high wires, there are few trees that are actually small enough to stay below hydro lines without some pruning management. Small trees that do eventually grow to the wire level are typically sheared to the required wire standoff. Shearing causes a vigorous flush of new branches the following year that grow faster than the original tree’s growth rate. This then requires even more pruning. Large trees can be structurally pruned to grow beside the wires. While this does alter the

shape of the canopy, the tree can still grow an impressive canopy on either side that provides significant benefits.

Structural branch management requires less frequent pruning cycles than top shearing.

The alternative would be to plant trees only where there are no overhead wires. Investment should be made in creating large, mature tree canopies where there are no obstructions. In an urban streetscape, there may only be hydro poles on one side of the street. The side without hydro poles would be planted with large trees that could grow to maturity, provide shade over the

Lakeshore Blvd., east of Islington Ave.: Tree growth compromised by significant overhead wiring.

30

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

sidewalk and street and make a strong visual impact on the streetscape. The City or community must decide if it is worth investing in continuous tree planting on both sides of the street, even if it means small trees under hydro lines or if it is worth investing in tree planting only where there are no hydro lines, so that mature canopies are achieved.

Species selection Large trees that have broad and open branching structures such as plane, oak and locust are easier to manage around utility wires than more finely branched trees with ascending branch structures, such as maple, linden and pear. Trees such as maple that are prone to develop co-dominant leaders should be avoided. Different trees are known to heal from pruning more easily than others through a process of compartmentalization of the wood cell structure. Trees known for good compartmentalization should be selected for use under overhead wires.

The ESA document Planting Under or Around Powerlines & Electrical Equipment also provides a species list based on height for planting within varying proximities to overhead power lines.

See Section 6 of this report for an annotated list of appropriate tree species.

Tree/wire location In most street tree applications, particularly with narrow sidewalks, the overhead wires and the tree alignment are often in the same location. Where possible, consider placing some of the trees out into the parking lane to provide some amount of offset in alignment. Large stature trees can be placed in these locations, while smaller to medium stature trees might be placed under the wires. Often, the higher voltage hydro distribution lines are only on one side of the street while the other side may only be local distribution, street-light or building connections. These secondary lines are more compatible with larger stature trees. In these cases, the tendency to plant the same species on both sides of the street should be avoided.

Trees, hydro wires and hydro pole on Queen St. W.

31

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Sidewalk Arrangements

Street tree planting with low barriers in Columbus, Ohio.

32

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

5. Details In addition to providing adequate soil volume and complementary paving systems, a few more components are needed to ensure successful establishment of newlyplanted trees and their longterm health. With budget in mind, only the essential components that protect the tree and provide water are evaluated in this section. Design details are also provided in the Appendices. These components should not hinder the growth of the tree.

Tree guards, for example, cause more damage than good as, aside from being expensive, they can get engulfed into a growing tree trunk.

This section discusses detailing related to the following issues: 5.1 Tree opening surface options: The materials used to cover the surface exposed by the wider tree openings proposed in this study, as well as fencing options to surround the openings.

5.2 Tree protection: Methods to guard trees from the damage caused by pedestrians, cyclists, dogs and other hazards.

Minimal design around trees at Bloor St. W., east of St. George St.

5.3 Water: Systems for collecting rainwater runoff and directing it to street trees to ensure adequate irrigation.

5.4 Root zone ‘ID’: A proposed system for identifying individual trees and their root systems to contractors and designers.

Tree covers that are now trip hazards and impeding trunk growth.

33

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

5.1 Tree Opening Surface Options The tree planting opening should be as large as possible.

It must also lie outside the realm of the pedestrian clearway. The tree will continually increase its volume and shape in the opening and any fixed object in this space will impede its growth. That leaves a fairly large area of open soil in the sidewalk that is gradually changing from soil to the wood of the trunk flare and structural root collar. This soil needs to be covered and made more attractive. Of all the material options for tree openings, bark mulch does the greatest good for the tree. The oft-used tree grate is the worst option for tree health and longevity. Other options available for tree opening surfaces are ground covers, gravel mulches, stabilized aggregate and loose set pavers. These will be discussed in order of their impacts on the tree.

Bark mulch Bark mulches are simple, cheap, and very effective.

Mulches should be shredded hardwood bark placed between 25 and 50mm thick. Filter fabric is not needed below the mulch. The shredded fibres interlock and stay in place much better than other types of mulch. Bark mulch retains water, absorbs salts and chemicals, buffers temperature and moisture fluctuations and decomposes, contributing small amounts of carbon to the soil. It needs to be replaced periodically once every year until the tree establishes sufficient roots and trunk flare in the space, so that the mulch is no longer needed. The old mulch should be removed prior to adding new mulch so that any contamination can also be removed. This is best done in the early spring, so that trapped winter salts can be removed before percolating down into the soil below.

While this is the ideal surface option for the tree, it does not have the ‘clean’ image that is often desired for in many commercial projects. Many designers prefer a machined, modern aesthetic for the urban public realm.

However, looking at the big picture, a streetscape with large, mature trees with mulch at their base would receive greater appreciation than small trees in gravel mulch.

Groundcover plantings A planting bed with groundcovers and tree is a very pleasing sight. The maintenance of these plantings — watering, fertilizer, mulching and weeding — generally

34

Bark mulch at tree opening

have a positive impact on the tree. Groundcovers should not be installed within the root ball area of the tree. In tree spaces 1.5m or smaller, there is not enough room for additional planting. Groundcovers are most effective in open planter situations with larger and longer tree spaces. To reduce the incidence of damage to these low growing plants, a low barrier or fence can be installed around the tree space. Gradually the tree will begin to out-compete the plantings, and they will decline. Trunk flare and roots will fill the tree opening as the tree grows.

Hardy shrubs, perennials and grasses are likely to be the most successful in planter beds, but the list of permanent plantings suitable for Toronto is limited and the seasonal interest is not nearly as exciting as annual plantings. Annuals must be replaced each year as they will not survive the winter, though they offer a brighter and wider range of colour and excitement in the summer.

Annuals also require more water, weeding, replacement and maintenance, all of which is dependent on continued funding. The continuous replanting of annuals does some damage to developing tree roots. If the planting is started at the time the tree is planted, however, the annuals will cause the surface rooting tendency of the tree to develop

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

at a lower level which may have long-term benefits for tree and paving management.

tree may already have occupied sufficient space by that time with roots and the trunk flare that replacement is not needed.

Gravel mulch Perimeter fencing or barriers Gravel mulch is more permanent than bark mulch. Many designers and developers prefer to use this material in commercial projects. The gravel should be 19 mm crushed granite, placed 50 mm thick. Filter fabric is not needed under the gravel. Gravel does not break down and it helps retain water in the soil. Weeds will grow in the gravel as silt and organic material settles into the gravel, so weeding is required. It needs periodic replacement, possibly every 10 years, to keep it fresh. Additionally, some maintenance may be required to sweep displaced gravel back into place. In a 1.5m tree opening space, the

Low fencing could be installed around the tree opening and is useful especially where ground covers will be planted. These low fences are a great opportunity for BIA groups and other street-design stakeholders to create a signature design element for their community.

This design element has been already considered by the City of Toronto’s Urban Design Streetscape Manual (April 2010, pg. 13) and is called “optional decorative protective railing.�

Groundcover planting at tree opening

Granite gravel mulch at East Bayfront, Toronto

35

Low barrier and groundcover at tree openings, Main St., Columbus, Ohio

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

5.2 Tree Protection To protect young trees from damage in an urban setting, tree protection is required. Protection strategies, however, should be cost efficient and not cut into the budget for the basic necessities for tree growth such as soil volume.

The most common cause of trunk damage is cyclists locking their bicycles to a tree when there are no rings available. The City should provide enough bicycle rings to decrease the incidence of this kind of tree damage. When placed on either side of the tree, bicycle rings also act as barriers to protect trees from pedestrian traffic.

Why a guard in the first place?

Options Newly planted trees have thin bark and are vulnerable to damage from snow plows, bicycles, dogs and other threats. As the tree grows thicker bark and a larger trunk, the tree can withstand greater abuse and the need for trunk protection is reduced. Post-planting, some type of trunk protection can reduce the extent and likelihood of damage. This protection material must be able to expand with the tree’s growth. The trunk will grow quickly, adding up to 12-15 mm to the trunk diameter each year after the tree is established. The trunk of a newly planted tree also sways in the wind and could be damaged if closely surrounded by a hard grate. The ideal trunk protector allows for growth and movement and would thus be flexible or at a sufficient distance to not cause damage.

Bicycles locked to trees at Jarvis St. and Queen St. E.

36

In high-density and high-traffic sidewalks where tree protection is a necessity for tree survival, several options are available to protect the trunk during the establishment period. These are low fences or barriers, plastic mesh and metal tree guards.

Low fences or barriers These barriers along the perimeter of the tree opening are very effective as they protect the trunk and ground covers. They do not need to be removed and have a long service life. They are likely the most expensive option depending on the design and materials.

Low fence at opening keeps people away from the tree and prevents damage.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

Plastic mesh A molded plastic mesh tree trunk protection is a simple way to protect the bark. It is currently used on Bloor Street West with great success. It is cheap, reusable, effective, and easy to remove when no longer needed.

They are highly recommended. Plastic mesh is cost effective and allows the budget to be directed towards soil volume which is fundamental to the growth of large, healthy, mature street trees.

Metal tree guards Many different types of metal tree guards are available off-the-shelf. Often these are expensive and must be removed as the tree grows. Metal tree guards are usually supported by a tree grate or other solid structure. These structures, however, can damage the base of the tree.

The tree guard itself must be quite large, a minimum of 500 mm in diameter to avoid damaging the tree.

Depending on the design, the space between the trunk and the guard can collect trash that is then difficult to remove. Tree guards are expensive when compared to the plastic mesh and may be only slightly less expensive than tree space barriers.

Effective tree bark protector (plastic mesh) and sign installed at Bloor St. W. revitalization project.

Although previously available models have been inadequate in size to allow for the tree’s early growth, there are now better options available that give sufficient room for a young tree to grow. The minimum recommended clear diameter is 600 mm.

Metal tree guards are not recommended for growing healthy, mature street trees in urban environments. Where sidewalk conditions are tight and where soil volume and tree opening needs have been met, additional budget may be directed to a ‘hard’ tree guard. The budget for removal of the tree guard must also be figured in. If the tree achieves the expected growth advocated for in these new standards, the tree trunk will be larger than the grate.

Tree protection is only required for the first two years of the trees establishment as long as the soil is sufficient to get the tree off to a good start. After this point, the bark is tough enough to withstand knocks with no detriment to its health.

37

Metal tree guard restricts tree trunk growth.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

5.3 Water Soil below the pavement is only as effective as its ability to hold water in the soil. A tree is effectively a large pump drawing all available water out of the soil. Soil volume calculations are based, in part, on capacity to hold sufficient water to support the tree between rain events.

Toronto has enough summer rains to support trees without active irrigation. Newly planted trees do need additional watering, but within a few years they will be self-sufficient.

One of the great benefits of large soil volumes is the soil’s improved ability to filter, soak up water and restore some natural cycle functions to urban streets. Harvesting runoff and directing it into the soil volume provides the additional watering that newly planted trees require to get established. It also reduces runoff surges on downstream waterways and Lake Ontario.

The rainwater harvesting system must collect the first flush of the rain. Not only is this the most important part of the rain event from a treatment perspective, but many rain events are small and capturing this smaller and more frequent rain event provides an even flow of water for the tree. After the first flush, the remainder of the water

from large rain events can continue on into the traditional storm sewer system.

Part of the cleaning of the first flush, includes large particulate matter, everything from cigarettes and candy wrappers, to sand, silts and leaves, seeds and plant parts. Even a relatively “clean� retail sidewalk maintains a constant flow of debris that washes off the pavement with each rain event. The rain harvesting system must be designed to intercept this flow and allow easy clean up for any traps and strainers provided. The debris must be intercepted so that it does not clog the rainwater distribution system where it would be difficult to remove.

The traps must be easy to clean and large enough to not require frequent cleaning. Even annual cleaning of these systems may be too much to expect. The system, channels, inlets and pipes must be robust and contain redundant pathways. Cleanouts throughout the system are critical. The technical aspects of the design must take precedence over aesthetic considerations.

The responsibility for maintaining this system must be determined and put in the budget. These aspects of the water harvesting approach have been significantly under estimated at both the design and operations levels on

Illustration of water-harvesting of sidewalk runoff.

38

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

most past projects.

The type of soil placed under the pavement and the amount of soil volume has a big impact on the amount and frequency of water that needs to be added or may also limit the amount of water that can be received by the soil volume. Larger soil volumes need and can accept larger amount of water. Sandy soils, sand based soil mixes and bioretention soils can accept larger volumes of water but need regular infusions of water to support tree roots as they tend to be fairly dry between

water applications. Heavier loam soils, including most harvested local soils, need water less frequently as they have good water holding capacity, but can also become waterlogged if too much water is applied.

Options to bringing water into soil include pressurized irrigation, bubbler activated passive irrigation, surface water harvesting systems that direct water into rills, trench drains or inlets, pervious paving, and hybrid systems that combine parts of each approach.

A passive irrigation system with multiple access points.

39

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

Pressurized irrigation Standard drip irrigation lines run under the pavement.

This is quite typical for privately maintained landscapes; however, these systems need significant amounts of maintenance. The drip emitters can become clogged and the lines periodically need to be replaced. The system needs to be winterized and replacing clogged or broken drip lines under the pavement is impossible. Due to this concern and City’s limited budget they are not recommended.

planting soil. The lines function by gravity to provide even water distribution and getting the hydrology between the pipes and soil is critical. Rigid pipes with the holes near the top of the pipe are best as water can flow down the length of the pipe to spread the water evenly around the planting soil. Maintenance of the main line and bubblers is made easier as the bubbler and the valve connections are all accessible inside the box. Winterization and other maintenance are still required. This type of system may be appropriate for projects with sufficient maintenance and budget to ensure operation.

Bubbler activated passive irrigation

Surface water harvesting

Perforated lines used for drainage can be set under the pavement within the soil. These are then connected to a box within the pavement where a pressurized bubbler can be activated to let water flow from the box into the perforated lines where the water infiltrates into the

Water flowing across the paving surface is collected in a rill, trench drain or inlet and directed into perforated pipes set within the soil. The system must be designed to capture the first flush of each rain event. As with the bubbler activated system, pipe and soil hydrology is

The catch basin is installed through the notched precast concrete slabs.

40

Precast concrete double reglet is installed on top of precast slab and takes water into wide catch basin.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

critical. The water must also pass through a sedimentcapturing device before entering the pipes under the pavement. This device can be a simple drop inlet with the outfall set higher than the bottom. The larger the inlet the greater the frequency between maintenance to remove sediment and debris. This is the recommended option when pervious paving is not an option.

by the water must be replaced after cleaning. A strip of pervious pavers within the space between trees over the soil zone can harvest most of the water needed by the tree. Pervious paving is not currently in wide use and education on its benefits and use would increase its acceptance.

Hybrid systems

Pervious paving Pervious paving offers a low to no maintenance and reliable way to harvest runoff water. It only works where there is no concrete base to the pavers. When it rains, sediment and debris wash over the paving and into the City storm system. Pervious paving will slowly clog but it never reaches the point where no water reaches the soil below. As joints clog, they can be cleaned and periodic pressure washing of pavements is sufficient to keep the system operational. Joint filler material washed out

Bubbler activated irrigation, surface water harvesting and pervious paving can be used in combination to provide more reliable watering to the soil below the pavement. The hybrid approach provides redundancy that permits one system to take over if another part of the assembly fails or slows down water intake volumes. The pressurized bubbler part of the system can be retained for drought periods; assuming that there are sufficient maintenance procedures to know that the system exists and could be activated.

The catch basin is installed with the reinforcing steel, prior to pouring the concrete.

41

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

Tooled double reglet into cast-in-place concrete takes water into a catch basin.

5.4 Root Zone ID To maintain healthy trees, it is vital that the trees and their root zones are indicated in the same databases that contractors access in order to understand sub-surface conditions prior to repair work.

This report recommends that the tree zones be mapped onto the TPUCC digital CADD database. Trees and their root zones would be locatable to both repair crews via the One-call system, and designers/engineers working on street retrofits. This would also give the utility companies a ‘heads up’ if there is a need to contact Toronto’s Urban Forestry Department in order to assist in tree removal.

An identifying marker disk is proposed that would be placed flush to the finished grade and directly adjacent to the tree. The disk would identify the method of pavement support above the root zone, which the contractor can use to determine methods for access and repair.

One root zone ID marker should be installed by every tree.

42

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Details

6. Horticultural Elements Healthy, mature urban street trees begin with healthy tree stock with good form and the right growing medium.

Guidelines for these practices are described in this section of the report and detailed in the drawings and specifications in the appendices.

6.3 Tree Maintenance: Healthy street trees must be continually maintained for structurally optimal growth and to avoid falling prey to pests.

6.4 Tree Species Suitability List: A number of pros and cons must be considered when selecting tree species for planting.

Topics discussed in this section include: 6.1 Nursery Stock Quality: At the nursery, quality trees suitable for street planting must be selected. It is important to be able to identify early signs of ill-health in nursery trees.

6.2 Tree Installation: There are a number of considerations related to the timing and techniques associated with planting.

43

6.5 Growing Medium: Trees must be planted in the appropriate mix of topsoil, coarse sand and compost.

Existing soil resources may also be present and put to use for new tree planting.

6.6 Tree Preservation: In retrofit situations, existing trees that merit preservation should be saved with careful planning and correct tree preservation techniques.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

6.1 Nursery Stock Quality Quality nursery stock is the first step in growing healthy, mature street trees. Defects in initial tree quality can impact health far into the future, reducing life expectancy and causing significant maintenance problems several decades after planting. Quality must be determined for the tree canopy, trunk and root system. In addition to basic tree quality, other issues related to root ball package types such as when and how the tree is harvested, stored, and transported must be specified to ensure that the resulting tree is ready to develop into the mature specimen intended.

It is critical to inspect trees in the nursery to ensure quality stock will be delivered to the project. The chart below outlines desirable and undesirable characteristics in tree selection at the nursery.

Rejected nursery trees with poor branching structure and no central leader.

Deeper root system in contact with less soil oxygen Lost root system

Nursery tree with unacceptable root ball

44

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Root ball as harvested Correct ANLA root ball position

Rejected nursery trees with J-root.

Rejected nursery trees with girdling and adventitious roots.

Characteristic

Accept

Reject

Canopy

• • •

Single central leader Straight, vertical and tapering Central bud at highest part of tree

• • •

Co-dominant stems Main stem is lopsided, unbalanced or headed Unstable and will split apart

Branch attachment

•

Strong branch attachments

• •

Sharp angles between branch and trunk Too many branches to prune without compromising overall form Branches might break off

Stakes and ties

•

At harvesting, all stakes and ties removed

•

Stakes and ties not removed. Ties can become embedded in the bark. Stakes too close to the trunk at the soil line can deform the future trunk flare.

Health

•

No wounds, insects or disease

•

Trees with wounds, insects or disease such as bores, sunscald cracks or frost cracks on trunk.

Grafted trees

•

The graft and developing trunk flare is visible at time of harvesting.

•

Buried graft points that force the trunk flare to be deep in the root ball Young branches suckering from rootstock below the graft

•

• Root flare

• • • •

Roots

• • • • •

45

Visible root flare at soil level Remove all excess soil above the root flare and near top of main roots before harvesting Any adventitious roots above the trunk flare should be removed Consistent root flare around circumference

•

Roots radiate evenly around main stem Balled and burlapped (B&B) trees with jute and biodegradable twine Wire basket removed from top 300 mm of top of root ball Burlap tied around trunk should be removed Bare root trees

• • •

•

•

Buried flare within root ball are susceptible to form girdling roots and strangle the tree Adventitious roots above trunk flare that grow in circular or semi-circular form

Asymmetrical root architecture J-roots where roots come out on one side T-roots where roots come out of trunk in 2 opposite directions Container grown trees have significant root structure issues that cannot be resolved

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

6.2 Tree Installation Proper plant material installation is one of the most critical elements of successful tree establishment and long-term survival.

The following factors must be considered during the installation of plant materials. Implementation of the best practices outlined below will significantly increase the likelihood of successful establishment and long-term tree survival.

In addition to general planting site constraints (soil quality, soil volume, drainage, above- and below-ground conflicts, etc.), there are additional factors which must be considered prior to, during, and following the installation of plant materials. These include: • • • • • •

Root pruning Season of planting Plant material transportation and handling Planting hole preparation Backfilling and irrigation Staking/guying

These factors notwithstanding, the majority of failed plantings result from one or more of three key factors: planting too deep, and under- or over-watering. If healthy, site-appropriate trees are planted at the correct depth and are properly irrigated, the plantings will stand a much higher chance of success.

Root pruning Trees 150 mm or larger may benefit from having been root pruned at least one growing season prior to harvesting. After root pruning the trees will need additional water. Better growers will do this as part of their normal practice. To ensure that this is undertaken, large trees should be pre-purchased at least one year in advance and arrangements with the grower made to root prune and maintain the trees.

Season of planting In general, trees should be planted in early spring or fall, thereby avoiding periods of active shoot elongation when roots may grow poorly. However, a number of tree species, including most oaks, red and silver maple,

46

London planetree, and others, perform better when transplanted in the spring.

Ideally, project schedules should take the appropriate planting season for the proposed plant material into consideration to ensure that the likelihood of tree survival is improved. If schedules are inflexible, smaller planting stock or larger root ball to caliper ratios may increase the chances of survival.

Plant material transportation, handling and irrigation Plant material is fragile, and must be handled accordingly.

The overall objectives of handling planting stock are to maintain root ball integrity, prevent stem scarring, and reduce the likelihood of plant tissue dessication. Trees should therefore be thoroughly irrigated at the nursery prior to shipping, should be shipped in closed trucks or with foliage wrapped to reduce evapotranspiration, and should be kept out of direct sunlight until planting.

Additionally, trees should not be rolled on their root balls (to prevent cracking), and should never be lifted by the trunk or dropped.

If trees are to be held on-site for an extended period of time (exceeding two hours), they should be regularly irrigated. The holding area should be sheltered from both sun and wind. If B&B trees are to be held on-site, the root balls should be covered by soil, mulch or similar medium to help prevent dessication. Bare-root root systems should be similarly treated, and application of antidesiccant foliar sprays may be required.

Planting hole preparation Proper preparation of the planting hole will have a significant effect upon the outcome of tree installation, and must take into account characteristics of the site soils.

In well-drained soils, the planting hole should be dug to a depth not exceeding or slightly shallower than the height of the root ball. Planting the tree too deep will deprive the root system of oxygen, prevent gas exchange, and restrict water. The bottom of the hole should be undisturbed; if disturbed, soil should be firmly tamped to prevent root ball subsidence. The hole should be dug

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

as wide as possible, and at least three times the root ball diameter. The sides of the planting hole should be sloped and scarified. The tree should be installed so that the top roots in the root ball are just below the soil surface; this may require removal (by hand) of some soil from the root ball. The trunk flare should be set slightly above final grade.

Backfilling and irrigation Backfill soil should be loose and friable, with most large clods of soil being broken up. Some soil clods (also called ‘peds’) should be retained to provide pore space and improved soil structure. Backfill soil should be lightly tamped by foot once one-half of the planting hole is filled, and should be irrigated to eliminate air pockets and provide moisture. The remainder of the planting hole should then be filled, without adding soil to the top of the root ball. In well-drained soils, a 25 to 40 mm high saucer of soil should be formed around the edge of the root ball.

Mulch should be added on top of and around the root ball to a depth not exceeding 80 mm, and set a minimum of 40 mm away from the root flare/trunk.

available, and selection of the proper system will be siteand species-dependent. All trees, however, should be tied to stakes using flexible and soft materials such as rubber or elastic webbing. Hose-wrapped wire should not be used. Most anchoring systems should be removed within one year following planting, unless trees are planted in poorly-drained or highly sandy soils which may inhibit the rapid development of strong anchor roots or a firm root/soil interface. Where appropriate, staking should be avoided altogether.

Trunk support staking may be required when smallcaliper or poorly-developed trees are to be planted. It is always preferable to avoid planting trees with weak or poorly-developed stems, but when such planting is required, support stakes should be installed. These stakes should be installed to the lowest point necessary to hold the tree upright, and should be installed close to the trunk using soft webbing or similar materials.

All anchor and support staking must be removed in a timely manner, or the newly-planted trees risk being girdled or otherwise deformed.

Following planting, the root ball should be thoroughly irrigated; irrigating too quickly and for too short a period of time may not allow water to adequately penetrate the root ball.

Staking/guying Staking or guying can be used for two purposes: to anchor an unstable root ball, and to support a weak trunk.

The objective of anchor staking is to prevent root ball rotation, which can lead to newly-planted trees falling over and can prevent proper root development. Anchor staking is usually achieved by driving two or more wooden stakes or metal posts into the ground and tying the tree to the stake. Stakes should be installed so that the root ball is firmly supported while allowing the trunk to move slightly. This encourages strengthening of the trunk, as the tree compensates for inherent weaknesses by developing wood where required.

A number of different anchor staking systems are

47

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

6.3 Tree Maintenance Four key horticultural elements must be taken into consideration following proper planting and mulching.

These include: • • • •

Watering Pruning

Fertilization Pest, disease and competition control

establishment. Trees planted in mid-summer should be watered daily for at least one week, and then on the schedule outlined previously. Periods of drought may necessitate more frequent watering for spring or fallplanted trees. Larger trees may require watering every other day for up to three months, and container-grown trees may have a longer establishment period than fieldgrown, B&B trees. Properly hardened-off field-grown trees may require less-frequent watering for less time.

Watering Planted trees require supplemental irrigation until they become successfully established, at which time natural rainfall should be sufficient to supply the water needs of trees planted in good sites. In the Toronto region, the establishment period typically lasts approximately 12 months for every 2.5 cm of trunk diameter at time of planting. Container-grown trees often take one or two months longer to establish than field-grown transplants.

Container-grown trees are not recommended and should not be planted.

The critical zone for irrigation is the newly-planted tree’s root ball. Irrigating surrounding soils is not necessary and can in fact be counter-productive. Adequate supplemental irrigation of the root ball encourages establishment by increasing the rate of root development, especially root penetration out of the root ball and into surrounding landscape soils.

Irrigation is absolutely critical to the success of tree plantings. If irrigation is cut off before establishment, the likelihood of tree mortality is substantially increased.

Conversely, overabundant irrigation, especially in poorly drained clay or compacted soils, can essentially drown roots by depriving them of gas and nutrient exchange capacity.

Proper watering needs to consider the irrigation system, the timing of watering, and the amount of water provided. Until the establishment period, trees should be watered using slow water emission devices, such as gator bags or root zone irrigation inlets.

In general, trees planted in early spring or fall will require watering every other day for approximately 1-2 months, with subsequent once-weekly watering until

48

Trees should be irrigated such that soil is kept moist at nearly all times, but complete soil saturation should be avoided. There is no ‘right amount’ of water to apply, but as a general rule a tree in well-drained soil should receive between four and eight litres of water per 2.5 cm trunk diameter at each irrigation. The exact amount will vary depending on soil drainage and other site-specific requirements.

A simple test to determine soil moisture content can be conducted by squeezing a handful of root ball soil. If water drips from the soil ball, water volume should be reduced. If the soil crumbles, water volume should be increased. Ideally, the soil should stay together. Root ball moisture content can also be felt by inserting a finger into the root ball.

Pruning Newly-planted trees should not be pruned to ‘compensate’ for root loss due to transplanting, as such pruning is ineffective and may in fact slow root growth.

However, young tree pruning should be undertaken to promote good canopy structure, particularly for trees with a natural decurrent (rounded and spreading) growth habit. Pruning should be undertaken at least 3 times within the first 10 to 15 years following planting, and more if required. The focus of such pruning should be to eliminate or prevent poor structural conditions such as included bark, co-dominant stems or sprouts, or to remove broken, dead, diseased, badly injured or infested branches. Young trees should be trained to develop a central leader, if possible, although some species will not respond well to such pruning due to their natural form.

Training should also be undertaken to encourage and maintain appropriate clearance from structures and over

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

streets and sidewalks. Consideration should be given to retaining temporary branches for two to five years, with the purpose of encouraging good stem taper and protecting the trunk.

requirements • Select densely-canopied trees to shade out weeds • Design sites for easy maintenance access Site preparation

Fertilization Trees generally do not need to be fertilized at time of planting. This does not mean, however, that fertilization is never appropriate – the decision to fertilize should always be supported by a soil fertility analysis and recommendations of a soil test.

• • • • •

Remove weeds and cultivate site soils prior to planting Prepare the site to ensure good drainage Provide adequate irrigation Plant new trees properly Apply mulch

Site maintenance Pest, Disease and Competition Control Due to the stresses associated with transplanting, newly-planted trees may be more susceptible to pest infestation, disease and pathogen infection, and competition from other types of vegetation.

Pests and diseases Pests and disease problems affecting young trees frequently begin in the nursery before the trees are transplanted into the landscape. For this reason, careful inspection of nursery stock before delivery is important to ensure diseased or infested stock is not established.

Should newly-planted trees show signs or symptoms of pest infestation or disease, an Integrated Pest Management (IPM) approach should be implemented to control the problem.

• Monitor and remove weeds regularly throughout the growing season, and remove weeds before they are well established • Establish thresholds for acceptable weed levels • Maintain adequate mulch levels • Reduce mowing intensity to encourage deeper turfgrass rooting • Avoid soil cultivation and edging in root zones, as it causes soil compaction and injures shallow roots

Competing vegetation Tree establishment can be delayed and overall tree health may suffer on sites with competing vegetation, particularly herbaceous weeds and turfgrass. Cultural practices to minimize weed competition should be undertaken when trees are planted in the landscape. As outlined below, strategies to minimize weed competition include proper site design, correct site preparation and planting, and adequate subsequent maintenance.

Site design • Select hardy and site-adapted species • Group plants with similar cultural, soil and irrigation

49

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

6.4 Tree Species Suitability List Different species of trees are suited to different planting typologies, and vary with regard to a number of factors including, among others: • • • • • • • • • • • •

General physiological requirements Soil moisture and nutrient requirements Adaptation to local climate and microclimates Long-term maintenance requirements (e.g., pruning) Root system characteristics Canopy form Pest and disease susceptibility Pollution tolerance Fruit and seed production Invasive potential and ‘weediness’ Biogenic volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions Aesthetics

The following chart outlines the general characteristics of tree species suitable for establishment within one or more of the tree planting typologies within the City of Toronto. Due to the limited utility of conifers for most street tree plantings, only deciduous trees are included in this list.

50

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Tree Selection Chart Botanical Name

Common Name

Origin

General Attributes / Comments

Acer nigrum

Black maple

S. Ontario

Acer rubrum

Red maple

Acer saccharinum

Potential Issues / Limiting Factors

Ideal pH

Suitable Locations

Height Range1 (metre)

Similar to A. saccharum, Similar to A. saccharum potentially more tolerant of difficult sites. Underutilized and uncommon.

OL

16-25 6.07.5 2

S. Ontario

Brilliant colour. Hardy cultivars. Generally urban tolerant.

Poor branch connections

OP, OL

16-25 <7.2

Silver maple

S. Ontario

Fast growth. Good colour. Hardy cultivars.

Urban tolerant.

Poor branch connections, weak wood, aggressive roots, heavy seed. Limit use.

OP, OL

16-25 4.57.0 2

Acer saccharum

Sugar maple

S. Ontario

Brilliant colour. Strong wood. Emblematic tree.

Dense shade. Some cultivars are more tolerant.

Limited tolerance to urban conditions. Sensitive to heat and drought. Some girdling roots. Some pest issues.

OL

16-25 5.57.3 2

Acer x Freemanii

Freeman maple

Hybrid

Hybrid of A. rubrum x A. saccharinum. Several cultivars available – select appropriate for site. Urban tolerant.

Combines both good and bad traits of parent species.

Poor branch attachment in some cultivars.

Aggressive root system; provide adequate opening to accommodate planting in hard boulevard conditions.

OP, OL

16-25 6.87.7 2

Aesculus glabra

Ohio buckeye

N. Showy flowers. Dense America shade. Visual interest.

Under-utilized.

Heavy fruit and messy leaves. Early leaf drop.

Toxic. Limit use.

OP*, OL

15-20 6.17.5 2

Amelanchier canadensis (standard form)

Serviceberry (tree)

S. Ontario

Strongly prefers moist soils with good drainage.

Potential for fire blight.

OP, OL

5-7

Carpinus betulus, esp.

‘Fastigata’

European Europe hornbeam

Urban tolerant.

Limited use as street tree Fastigiate form good for due to low branching compact sites. Tolerates habit. Poor salt tolerance. heavy pruning.

CT, OP, OL

10-15 5.0-8.0

Celtis occidentalis

Common hackberry

S. Ontario

Urban tolerant. Showy bark. Fruit attracts birds. Dense shade.

Graceful mature form.

Requires careful pruning for good longterm form.

Girdling and surface roots possible. Little decay resistance. Susceptible to mechanical damage.

CT, OP, OL

16-25 6.0-7.8

Cladrastis kentukea (syn. lutea)

Yellowwood

N. Fairly hardy. Showy America flowers. Moderately drought tolerant.

Requires frequent structural pruning in first 15 years; do not plant if pruning program is not in place. Unpruned trees tend to fall apart within 30 years.

OP, OL

10-14 6.0-7.8

51

Small tree, also available in shrub form.

Good for compact sites.

Very showy flowers.

Edible berries attract wildlife.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

2

5.67.5 2

Tree Selection Chart Botanical Name

Common Name

Origin

General Attributes / Comments

Corylus colurna

Turkish hazel, filbert

Europe/ Hardy; urban and Asia pollution tolerant. Good for smaller spaces.

Ginkgo biloba Ginkgo

Asia

Gleditsia triacanthos var. inermis

Thornless honey locust

Gymnocladus dioicus

Potential Issues / Limiting Factors

Height Range1 (metre)

Ideal pH

Few if any issues. Nuts CT, OP, may be unsightly or messy OL to some.

12-15

5.5-8.5

Use named cultivars only to ensure male trees; females develop foulsmelling fruit about 20 years after planting each fall. Prune to develop strong central leader due to tendency for co-dominant stems. Overutilized in some areas.

CT, OP, OL

15-22 5.07.0 2

N. Urban tolerant. Fast America growing. Cast light shade.

Susceptible to aphids and defoliators. Over-utilized.

Only thornless and seedless cultivars should be used. Branches can be brittle. Rarely grows with single leader; prune to reduce co-dominant stems and tight crotches.

CT, OP, OL

15-22 5.5-8.0

Kentucky coffeetree

S. Urban tolerant. Winter Ontario interest. Almost entirely (limited) pest and disease-free.

Relatively rare. Good canopy structure.

Male cultivars are strongly preferred due to unsightly, hard and large seed pods on female trees.

Some object to sparse branching in young trees.

CT, OP, OL

15-22 6.0-8.0

Liquidambar styraciflua

Sweetgum

N. Under-utilized. Good America canopy structure requires little pruning.

Interesting fruit and foliage.

Aggressive root system; provide adequate opening to accommodate planting in hard boulevard conditions. Does not tolerate soils above 7.5 pH.

OP*, OL

16-20 5.57.0 2

Liriodendron tulipifera

Tulip-tree

S. Fairly urban tolerant.

Ontario Fast- and large-growing. (limited) Good structure. Showy flowers and foliage.

Susceptible to aphids which cause honeydew drop. Aggressive root system; provide adequate opening to accommodate planting in hard boulevard conditions.

OP*, OL

20-30 4.57.5 2

Nyssa sylvatica var. sylvatica

Black gum, tupelo

S. Fairly urban tolerant.

Ontario Good structure. Under(limited) utilized. Good for poorly-drained soils.

Few issues. Low utilization CT*, OP, makes it difficult to find OL and to track progress.

15-20 5.57.0 2

Urban tolerant. Light shade. Interesting foliage. Pest and disease resistant.

CT – Covered trench

OL – Open landscape

OP – Open planter

* – limited or untested applicability

52

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Suitable Locations

Tree Selection Chart Botanical Name

Common Name

Origin

General Attributes / Comments

Potential Issues / Limiting Factors

Suitable Locations

Height Range1 (metre)

Ideal pH

Ostrya virginiana

Ironwood

S. Ontario

Urban tolerant. Midsized. Few pests and diseases. Winter interest. Good for birds.

Should be utilized more.

Few issues. Salt-sensitive and does not thrive in wet soils.

CT, OP, OL

8-12

4.27.6 2

Phellodendron Amur amurense cork-tree

Asia

Fairly urban tolerant and Male cultivars should be OP, OL hardy. Virtually pest and used to avoid messy fruit. disease-free.

Potentially invasive. Needs adequate soil volume to be truly urban tolerant.

Pruning required for good structure.

Platanus occidentalis

Sycamore

S. Urban tolerant. Visual Ontario interest. Good canopy (limited) form. Prefers moist and will tolerate quite poor soils. Dense shade.

Platanus x acerifolia

London Europe plane-tree

Quercus bicolor

Swamp white oak

Quercus macrocarpa

Bur oak

Quercus Chinkapin muehlenbergii oak

10-15 6.0-8.0

Susceptible to several diseases and pests.

CT* 20-25 4.96.5 2 (due to spreading roots), OP, OL

Urban tolerant. Visual interest. Good canopy form. Drought tolerant.

More pest and disease tolerant than Sycamore.

Aggressive root system; provide adequate opening to accommodate planting in hard boulevard conditions.

CT* 20-25 3.7-8.2 (6.52 (due to for var. spreading â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Bloodroots), goodâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;) OP, OL

S. Ontario (ltd.)

Under-utilized and not tested, but a promising urban tolerant tree. Tolerates wet, compacted soils. Does not tolerate alkaline soils.

As most oaks, susceptible to a number of pests and diseases. Untested in urban areas. Transplant in spring.

CT*, OP, OL

15-20 4.36.5 2

S. Ontario

Urban tolerant. Largegrowing. Visual interest.

Good form and strong wood. Drought tolerant and adaptable to a wide range of soils.

Like most oaks, difficult to transplant. Spring planting. Requires ample soil volume to avoid root/ sidewalk conflicts.

CT, OP, OL

20-25 4.57.5 2

S. Ontario (ltd.)

Urban tolerant. Midsized. Well suited for streetscapes. Highly under-utilized and difficult to procure, should be utilized far more frequently.

Few pest and disease problems. Adaptable to most soils.

Few issues. Difficult to procure. Spring planting.

CT, OP, OL

12-15

6.5-8 2

1 In optimal growing conditions. Difficult sites often result in shorter trees.

2 Ensure that growing medium pH is acceptable for species. The Growing Medium Specification that accompanies this report defines the acceptable pH range as 6.0 to 7.8. Where species require less alkaline soil, the pH maximum should be lowered to an appropriate level for those plants. Note that lower pH growing medium will cost more due to the lack of availability of lower pH components.

53

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Tree Selection Chart Botanical Name

Common Name

Origin

Quercus plaustris

Pin oak

Quercus robur

Quercus shumardii

General Attributes / Comments

Potential Issues / Limiting Factors

Suitable Locations

Height Range1 (metre)

N. Urban tolerant in acidic America soils. Good canopy form.

Chlorotic in alkaline soils (>7 pH). Susceptible to several pests and diseases.

OP, OL

15-20 5.06.5 2

English oak

Europe

Winter-persistent leaves can be attractive or a nuisance, depending on perspective. Columnar trees may have poor structure. Large acorns may be problematic.

OP, OL

15-18 4.57.5 2

Shumard oak

N. Urban tolerant. Brilliant America foliage. Under-utilized.

Tolerates a wide range of soils; wider than red oak.

Susceptible to gypsy moth and other pests and pathogens, but not sufficiently to preclude its use. Large-growing at maturity. Potentially difficult to procure.

OP, OL

20-25 5.87.6 2

Robinia Black pseudoacacia locust ‘Purple Robe’ or ‘Frisia’

N. Urban tolerant. Showy America and fragrant flowers.

Attractive to pollinators.

Light shade. Decayresistant wood.

Invasive. Brittle branches; CT, OP fine twigs can cause litter. Requires dedicated pruning to form good structure. Use sparingly and only in difficult conditions, avoid planting in open landscapes due to invasive potential. Thorny.

15-20 4.57.5 2

Sophora japonica

Japanese pagoda tree, sophora

Asia

Requires some pruning to form good structure.

Flowers and fruit potentially messy.

Unknown invasiveness potential.

CT, OP, OL

15-20 4.5-8.2

Tilia x ‘Redmond’

‘RedN. Urban tolerant. Good mond’ America pyramidal form. Showy basswood – flowers. Vigorous and cultivar more decay-resistant than other lindens.

Increasingly common but not over-utilized yet.

Expansive root system.

Susceptible to aphids which cause honeydew drop. Occasional suckers at base.

OP, OL

15-20 4.5-8.5

Urban tolerant.

Adaptable to wide range of soils and moisture regimes, including drought. Fastigiate and standard forms available. Few pests and diseases.

Highly urban tolerant.

Tolerant of heat and drought. Showy flowers after approx 10 years.

CT – Covered trench

OL – Open landscape

OP – Open planter

* – limited or untested applicability

54

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Ideal pH

Tree Selection Chart Botanical Name

Common Name

Origin

General Attributes / Comments

Potential Issues / Limiting Factors

Suitable Locations

Height Range1 (metre)

Tilia cordata/ tomentosa

Littleleaf/ silver linden

Europe

Urban tolerant, esp. cordata. Adaptable to a wide range of soils.

Moderately droughttolerant.

Generally over-utilized.

Susceptible to aphids which cause honeydew drop. Suckers at base when stressed. Tendency to form co-dominant stems; requires early pruning to provide good structure.

CT (cordata),

15-20 6.5-8.2 (cordata) / 6.2-7.2 (tomentosa)

OP, OL

Ideal pH

Ulmus americana cvs.

White elm cultivars

S. Urban tolerant. Graceful Ontario form reminiscent of -cultivars stately elms which once dominated urban forests. Strong wood. Adaptable to a wide range of soils.

Cultivars such as ‘New Harmony’, ‘Liberty’, and ‘Valley Forge’ appear to have some Dutch Elm Disease (DED) resistance.

All U. americana cultivars are still susceptible to DED to some degree, and to other pests and pathogens. Extensive shallow root system requires space. Limit use due to DED, but use where hardy trees are necessary in small numbers. Requires early pruning to develop good form and strong canopy.

CT*, OP, OL

20-30 5.5-8.0 (varies by cultivar)

Ulmus hybrids

Elm hybrids

Varies (typ.

Asia)

Urban tolerant. A range of more DEDresistant elm hybrids are available, incl.

‘Accolade’, ‘Cathedral’, ‘Homestead’, etc.

Wide variety in canopy shapes, from typical vase-shape to more rounded. Adaptable to wide range of soils.

DED resistance of all cultivars is not longterm tested. Some have aggressive root systems.

Require early pruning to develop good form and strong canopy.

CT, OP, OL

18-22 Varies

Zelkova serrata

Japanese zelkova

Asia

Urban tolerant. Similar in form to graceful U. americana, but shorter and more rounded.

‘Green Vase’ is closest.

Adaptable to most soil types and moisture regimes. Almost pestfree. Should be planted in difficult spaces more often. Potentially largegrowing.

Branches form in whorls around main stem; require pruning to select best branches and form good canopy. Subject to canker if injured/wounded.

Potential for branch breakage if branches too large.

CT, OP, OL

15-22 5.57.5 2

1 In optimal growing conditions. Difficult sites often result in shorter trees.

2 Ensure that growing medium pH is acceptable for species. The Growing Medium Specification that accompanies this report defines the acceptable pH range as 6.0 to 7.8. Where species require less alkaline soil, the pH maximum should be lowered to an appropriate level for those plants. Note that lower pH growing medium will cost more due to the lack of availability of lower pH components.

55

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

6.5 Growing Medium Growing medium quality and volume are a critical component to growing healthy mature trees. Soil to support trees must exhibit physical, chemical and biological properties suitable for tree growth. Soil volume must be sufficient to support the desired canopy size. Finally soil sources must be factored into the requirements of any soil design.

Agricultural soil labs sift the gravel out of the sample before determining the % of each particle. The gravel is reported separately and only if requested. Gravel and other inert objects should never be more than 8% of the total soil sample.

The size of sand in soil varies from 0.05 mm to 2.0 mm. Sand larger than 0.25 mm is considered medium to coarse sand. These larger sand sizes contribute to improving drainage in soil. Agricultural soil labs also do not report different sand particle sizes. Special testing is required to make this determination. Natural soils in the Toronto area generally have mostly finer sands.

Physical properties The physical properties of soil include texture, structure, profile, density and drainage. The following are the physical properties requirements for a healthy soil to support urban trees.

While the above soil types are ideal for existing soil, once these soils are heavily graded or compacted they tend to become less usable for tree rooting due to increased density and loss of structure. Sandy loam soil with the majority of the sand medium to coarse in size are considered the best soil in urban areas to import into new planting beds. Because these soils are rare in the Toronto region, often manufactured soil blends are created to

Texture Soil texture is expressed in the nomenclature of the soil texture triangle. Generally loam, sandy loam, sandy clay loam and silty loam soils are the best soils to support tree growth provided they are in a fairly narrow area of the center portion of the textural triangle.

Structure

Clumps / clods peds

Density

AIR + WATER +

weight / volume pore space

Texture

sand / silt / clay

Soil Organisms

Carbon

Nutrients NPK+

Organic matter

pH

Acidity

56

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

HEALTHY = GROWING MEDIUM

within the peds. Small spaces called micro pores hold water in capillary action. This water is what the plant roots use. Large spaces called macro pores are the critical pathways for air, water and soil biology.

Understanding soil structure is critical to understanding soil quality, but structure cannot be tested, it can only be observed in the soil. Maintaining soil peds to the greatest extent possible is critical when working with soil.

Profile

Loamy growing medium mix with peds is desirable.

Sandy growing medium mix without peds (i.e. screened) should be rejected.

provide the needed coarse fraction sand. Coarse sand is added to natural soils to improve the drainage. Normally compost is also added to the mix to increase soil organic matter. Soil mixes are discussed separately below.

Structure Soil particles stick together forming larger structures known as â&#x20AC;&#x153;peds.â&#x20AC;? The glue that holds them together are clays, fungi and organic glue created by soil biology.

Over very long periods of time, freeze thaw, wetting and drying, soil organisms, root action and other forces create a diversity of spaces and fracture lines within the soil mass. Two sizes of spaces are created between and

57

Natural soils generally change in quality with depth and often layers of different soils can be identified in a section cut into the soil. The upper layers (called horizons) of soil are normally higher in organic content and have strong structure. The soil generally changes colour with depth becoming lighter and less brown the deeper in the profile one digs. The brown colour is reflecting the staining of the soil particles with organic matter. Generally the darker the color the greater the amount of organic matter. The upper layer of browner soil is called the A horizon and is often referred to as topsoil. Above the A horizon may be a layer of decomposing organic matter such as leaves or other decaying plant matter. This layer is referred to as the O horizon. Topsoil is a much abused and ill-defined term and great care should be used when including it in a specification. Below the A horizon is usually different layers including the B horizon which is a similar material to the A horizon but with distinctly less organic matter.

Layers with different colours and texture further down are labeled as various C horizons and normally represent the original parent soil material that has not been significantly influenced by organic activity.

Soil in urban areas also has profiles, but these profiles have been modified by development with the natural soil buried or moved around. In natural soils, the sequence of soil profiles generally contribute to the movement of water up and down to create good soil moisture levels for trees. In urban areas, modified layers often alter or stop the movement of water.

It is critical when purchasing soil, evaluating existing soils for reuse or constructing new planting soil beds to consider soil profiles and their impact on soil quality and the movement of water.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Density Natural soil, particularly the upper horizons have a density that permits the flow of water and air into the soil and allows roots to force their way through the soil mass. Soil density is expressed in dry weight divided by volume (g/cm 3 or kg/m 3). The upper limits of soil density that are limiting to root penetration change with soil type with sandy loam becoming root limiting at approximately 1.65 g/cm 3 and silty loam soils approximately 1.45 g/cm 3.

Soil density increases when soil structure is lost due to grading and or physical compaction. When construction disrupts the soil, it compresses the macro pores between the soil particles, which reduces drainage and air exchange.

Soil when being placed in a planting bed can also be installed at too low a density. Loose soil will settle and can cause trees to settle out of position or become unstable. Loose soil around root balls can hold excessive water or drain too fast. Settlement can cause soil levels to drop below adjacent paving edges creating tripping hazards or trapping surface water. It is generally best to install any soil higher than desired and allow some natural settlement rather than trying to compact it to an optimum density where no soil settlement will occur. This mounding should be approximately 25 mm for each 250 mm of soil depth.

Testing density must be performed in the field on undisturbed samples using special equipment. The recommended optimum soil density for natural harvested soil to be used for planting is between 1.5 and 1.6 g/cm 3 for sandy loam and between 1.35 and 1.45 g/cm 3 silty loam. Density for soil mixes will be discussed below.

Drainage It is critical to move water into the soil during rain events, and also to ensure that the water can drain out after the rain such that the macro pores are filled with air but not so dry that there is not sufficient water in the micro pores. Soil texture, structure, density and the amount of organic matter in the soil all play a role in drainage rates.

Drainage rates of between 12 mm and 75 mm per hour are considered optimum. Drainage rates must be

58

measured in the field, however, soil can be tested in the lab if it is compacted to a prescribed density.

In constructed planting beds, the drainage rate of each soil layer in the profile must be specified. If the soil in the lower layer is too slow, water can become trapped in the upper soil layer even if the upper soil is rapidly draining.

One way to help move soil across this barrier is to till the lower soil before adding the upper soil to make a transition zone between the two layers. Alternatively drain lines can be added in the bottom of the upper soil layer to drain away the excess water.

Chemical properties Plants need minimum levels of critical nutrients available in the soil in order to grow. These chemicals are generally present in the soil but may not be in a chemical form that the plant can uptake. In nature, soil biology processes nutrients and converts them into plant available substances. These chemicals can also be added in the form of fertilizer when they are deficient. Soil can also be over fertilized. Fertilizer should never be added to soil without first taking a soil test to determine what is needed. The soil test should include recommended application rates.

Fertilizer rates recommended for agricultural uses including nursery production are normally too high for urban trees where slightly lower application rates may be better. Lower fertilizer rates may reduce the incidence of some disease and insect infestations. Over fertilization also produces chemical rich runoff that enters streams and ultimately Lake Ontario, causing significant environmental impacts. Optimizing the soilâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s biological properties, as discussed below, is typically the best way to optimize the soilâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s chemical properties.

Given that much of the soil urban trees will access is under pavements and ultimately inaccessible to maintenance, it is important to get the correct chemical balance in the soil at the time of construction of any soil system. Most of the required chemicals needed by trees are available in sufficient quantities for the life of the tree.

Nitrogen is the one element that is not found in soil as a mineral, but is in the air in the soil, constantly being replaced as the soil breathes. Soil organisms process this

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

nitrogen into plant available form.

system even when surrounded by pavement.

A critical part of soil chemistry is soil pH or the level of soil acidity/alkalinity. Soil pH controls the soils ability to uptake the nutrients in the soil. If the soil pH is either too low or too high the plant may show chemical deficiencies even though the soil test may indicate that there is sufficient soil nutrients. Higher pH, above 7.5 causes the greatest problems in urban soils. The Toronto area soils are typically higher than 7.5. It is advisable to use trees that are tolerant of high pH soils rather than trying to adjust the soil pH.

Elevated soil pH, poor drainage, compaction, and excessive fertilizer can reduce microbial populations.

Increasing soil organic matter can improve soil organisms. Use of compost teas on the soil in conjunction with adding compost has been shown to make improvements, however this approach requires access to the soil, which is difficult in any soil systems below paving.

The growing medium specification that accompanies this report allow for a pH range of 6.0 to 7.8. The tree species list in this section provides ideal pH ranges. Ensure that the tree species selected is suitable for the soil pH. Salt in the soil has a negative impact on the plants ability to uptake water. This salt, however, must be present during the growing period of the tree. In Toronto, winter applied salt frequently washes out of the upper level of the soil during early spring rains. Observations in the city indicate that trees that have sufficient soil drainage and large soil volumes are not affected by winter salt.

Biological properties All surface soils contain some level of organisms that are part of an interconnected web of life, the soil food web. This diverse and complex set of organisms process the chemicals that plants use as well as building soil structure, increasing drainage and lowering soil density.

These organisms need air, water and a source of carbon to survive. The air and water must be able to flow through the soil. Carbon comes from soil organic matter.

Decaying plant roots contribute significant amounts of organic matter to the soil. Trees are net contributors to soil organic matter. Most of this organic matter comes directly from the roots of the tree and as the tree increases in size, the soil organic matter increases. Less than half of the soils organic matter comes from leaves decaying into the soil. Urban trees can survive without having additional mulch or compost added to the soil or allowing leaves to decay into the soil. As long as there is sufficient water, drainage, pore space and initial organic matter the tree can become a self-sufficient urban

59

Soil organic matter is measured as a percent of the total dry weight of the soil sample. Soil organic matter should be between 3 and 5% dry weight in the upper layer of the profile at the time the soil is installed. Organic matter in the lower soil level should be between 1.5 and 3% dry weight. This difference can be accomplished by making two different soils or simply tilling additional compost into the surface of the soil.

Soil volume The recommended soil volume to grow large healthy urban trees is 30 m 3 when the tree is alone in a soil bed. In tree groupings with shared soil, 20 m 3 per tree is recommended. Soil resources may also exist on site and can be used to reach the desired soil volume. See Section 2 of the report.

Soil sources The soil in the Toronto area is mostly silty loam with very fine sand. There are variations and some fine sandy loam soil exists. Coarse sandy loam soil is rare. Fine sands and silts are prone to drain poorly and be selfcompacting. For this reason most natural soils need to have considerable sand added to the soil to make them perform well in the urban environment.

The primary source of soil for purchase is ongoing development sites primarily in suburban locations. At these sites, topsoil is harvested and sold for reuse during the construction process. This soil supply is subject to swings in the construction market with less supply available when suburban construction slows. Much of these soils are purchased by a limited number of planting soil suppliers for processing into soil mixes.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Growing medium mixes The typical growing medium mix for tree planting is a mixture of naturally harvested A and O horizon soil also known as topsoil, coarse sand and compost. The quality of these mix components vary significantly over time and from source to source. For this report, three Ontario soil suppliers were consulted for pricing and availability: Gro-Bark (Caledon, ON), Hermanns (Schomberg, ON) and Earthco Soil Mixtures (Concord, ON). The exact mix proportions will vary depending on the application, the type of soil and the size of the coarse sand fractions. It is important when purchasing soil mixes, that sufficient quality control processes be implemented to ensure consistency in the mix. The following are the critical aspects of each component.

Soil The soil component must be harvested from the O and A horizons of a natural soil bed. These soils will typically be dark brown and have an organic matter content of between 3-8% dry weight when tested by ignition. It is important that the organic matter not be derived from adding compost to a subsoil to make a “topsoil.” This is relatively easy to discern in the soil sample as pieces of the compost can be observed in the soil. Organic matter must be coating the soil particles, the result of a long process of soil biology in the soil.

Soil with the highest percent clay should be valued over soils with relatively higher levels of silt. Sandy loam soils that consist of primarily fine sands are a poorer quality material to use in a soil mix than soils with higher clay and silt content. This may be counter intuitive but the fine sands tend to slow drainage in the ultimate mix while the clay is needed to hold moisture and nutrients as well as creating stronger peds. Soil texture should be classified as loam, sandy loam or sandy clay loam with clay content between 15-25%.

Natural soils normally have clumps, clods or peds present in the soil when it is dug up and graded. These peds are the result of weathering, the activity of soil biology and clay sticking soil particles together into larger aggregates. These aggregates are important to the movement of air and water into the soil. Maintaining

60

these peds is very important to the performance of the soil mix. Soils should not be screened or shredded during the collection, handling and processing procedures.

Unfortunately screening and shredding is common in the industry but suppliers are willing to stop this procedure when requested. Clumps of root mat, large clumps of soil and even the occasional stone, stick, root or residual trash that would normally be removed by screening should be considered acceptable provided that the total of such “inert” objects larger than 2 mm in diameter is less than 8% of the total soil volume.

The chemical composition of the soil component should meet agricultural requirements for fertile field soil. The pH of the soil is probably the most critical chemical factor to consider as pH controls nutrient uptake by plants. In the Toronto area, pH in soils tends to be around 7.0 to 7.8 or higher than the optimum. Sources of soil with lower pH between 6 and 7.3 are more valuable when they are available.

Coarse Sand Coarse sand is needed to improve drainage in the soil.

The amount of coarse to medium-sized sand (0.25 to 2.0 mm) in the mix is required to be between 50% and 60% in order to drain fast enough but still maintain adequate moisture holding capacity.

Coarse sand is defined as ASTM C-33 coarse concrete sand with 100% passing a 6 mm sieve, no more than 12% passing a 0.25 mm sieve and a fines Modulus index of between 2.8 and 3.2. The pH of sand should be 7.0 or lower.

Compost Compost is the result of biological activity breaking down raw organic material such as leaves, bark, wood or agricultural by-products such as manure, field stubble or food waste. The composting process converts the carbon in the plant cells to a more stable and useful material in the soil. In the most simplistic view, the longer the material is composted the more stable the carbon when it is added to the soil.

The material that makes up the feedstock of the compost

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

pile produces compost that performs differently in the soil mix. The most common feedstock is yard waste trimmings. This type of compost is best when used as a surface treatment of the top layer of soil. Composted bark material, composted pine bark in particular, is best used in a soil mix for tree soils.

Good compost should be dark brown to black, the colour of 70% cocoa dark chocolate. Individual pieces of material in the compost, when broken apart, should be the same colour inside as outside. A good way to test the quality of compost is to evaluate its carbon to nitrogen ratio (C/N). Compost should have a C/N ration of 15:1 to 25:1. A second test is the Solvita Maturity Index test, which measures the rate that carbon dioxide is released from the soil. A Solvita Index of 6 to 8 is considered acceptable compost.

But even good compost is far from being similar to the stable humus carbon forms found in soil. This process takes decades not months. Once added to the soil, compost continues to break down, shrinking in volume.

For this reason it is wise to limit the amount of compost in a soil mix for tree planting. The compost is primarily there to increase the organic matter level in the soil, which was reduced by the addition of the coarse sand to the mix. Compost should be added to the soil mix at a rate of approximately 12 - 15% by volume.

Soil Mix Ratio While final soil mix design will vary depending on the types of soil, sand, and compost, and the need for drainage required by the application, there are base soil mix ratios that can be considered. The best way to determine if a soil mix is going to perform correctly is to test its permeability at the specified maximum anticipated compaction. This is a lab test where a large soil sample is compacted to a known proctor density, usually 80% and 85% and then the soils permeability in cm/h is measured. Good soils should have a flow rate of 25-75 cm/h. This rate is primarily controlled by the amount of sand in the mix.

Assuming that the application is for trees, with only minimum amount of storm water allowed to be added to the soil, and the mix is made from typical products

61

available in the Toronto areas as described above, a reasonable mix ratio is the following: Mix component % by volume Coarse Sand: 45-50% Soil: 40-45% Compost: 12-15% It is beneficial to add some additional compost in the upper layer of planting beds after the soil is placed.

Adding 100mm of yard waste compost tilled into the top 100mm of planting soil will create a generous A horizon in the mix without fear of settlement in the deeper soil layers. This final tilling will help reduce any surface compaction that occurs during project finishing work that inevitably finds contractors walking over or using soil beds as workspace.

Soil installation As the soil is installed, there are several key points that must be followed. These are subsoil drainage; transition layers between planting soils and subsoil; angle of repose of subsoil supporting structures; planting soil placement; and planting soil compaction.

Subsoil drainage The soil below the planting soil must drain adequately and be able to receive excess water from the planting soil. Typically it is excess compaction in the subsoil that causes poor drainage; particularly in fine-grained loam, clay loam, and silt loam soil. Drainage conditions must be checked prior to placing soil. Unfortunately if the subsoil is not draining adequately it may be too late to add drain lines. Design of planting soils should always allow for the worse case drainage situations.

Drainage can be improved by loosening the subsoil just prior to planting soil installation. If this does not solve the problem, drain lines, set in sand beds, and connected to storm sewer inlets, must be installed.

Transition layers between planting soils and subsoil The planting soil should not be placed on a subgrade

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

that is smooth. The subgrade must be roughened either by dragging the teeth of a back hoe bucket or by using a roto-tiller just prior to the soil installation. This will aid in the movement of water from the planting soil into the subsoil.

A good rule of thumb is to set final soil grades 10% or more of the total soil depth above the design grade.

For example is the soil is placed 750 mm deep provide an additional 75 mm inches of soil mounded above the design grade.

Angle of repose of subsoil supporting structures

Soil is typically placed with a loader and distributed by hand or small equipment. There is a trend to use soilblowing machines to place soil. This equipment breaks up important soil peds and damages the soil structure.

Soil blowing equipment must never be permitted!

Whenever planting soil is to be placed next to compacted subsoil that is supporting a structure such as a curb or paving edge, the excavation along the structure must be set with an angle of repose away from the structure at an angle appropriate for the type of subgrade material and the expected loading.

Planting soil placement Planting soil must be placed with sufficient compaction to reduce settlement but not over compacted. In areas where soil is to be over 450 mm deep, the soil needs to be placed in lifts between 300 and 450 mm thick and each lift compacted to the specified amount. Even if compacted to the correct amount some soil settlement must anticipated. Placing unconsolidated soil leaves fairly large amount of soil pores that will gradually fill with soil particles over time. The compost will continue to shrink.

62

Planting soil compaction Planting soil should be compacted to approximately 75-80% Proctor density. Soils start to become root limiting at about 85%. Obtaining the required density is difficult as equipment and people move over the soil during the soil placement and planting process. The approximate correct soil density is normally achieved with a minimum of effort. A single pass at each lift by a tracked skid steer or a plate vibrator may be all that is needed. Having the soil near optimum moisture content is critical. Soil that is over compacted must be loosened to the entire depth.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

6.6 Tree Preservation Preserving existing trees is crucial to maintaining and increasing urban forest canopy cover, and should be an important consideration in the development, construction, planning and design processes.

This section outlines best practices for preserving and working around existing trees, and for retrofitting additional soil volume in proximity to existing trees.

Not all trees can or should be preserved In some cases, the overall benefit associated with a project which requires tree removal will be greater than the benefit of retaining trees. Trees in poor structural condition or health may be a liability, rather than an asset. Tree preservation should focus on trees which legitimately merit retention, and resources should be allocated.

Existing policies Focus on preventing injury The protection of existing trees is regulated by several existing City of Toronto by-laws and policies. These include: City of Toronto Municipal Code: • C hapter 813, Article II: “Trees on City Streets”, which regulates trees located on the City road allowance, and allocates authority for planting, care, maintenance and removal of trees to the City; and • C hapter 813, Article III: “Private Tree Protection”, which prohibits the injury or destruction (removal) of trees greater than 30 cm DBH without a permit, notwithstanding certain exceptions.

Tree injury is very difficult to mitigate once it has occurred; therefore, tree preservation efforts should focus on preventing tree damage and environmental degradation in the tree’s rooting area.

Impacts are cumulative and long-term Construction impacts such as root loss, soil compaction, and wounding can add up to a situation that is worse than the sum of its component parts, and even seemingly insignificant impacts can lead to tree mortality in the long term.

All parties must communicate effectively

Tree Protection Policy and Specifications for Construction Near Trees: utlines approaches to and specifications for the O preservation of existing by-law protected trees on construction sites. Key issues include: Tree protection zone (TPZ) distances, barriers and signage; • • • •

Site and landscape plan requirements; Tree removal and relocation; Security deposits; and Provisions for emergency repairs.

Tree Preservation Principles In preserving and working around existing trees, several general principles should guide tree preservation efforts, both in the planning stages and during implementation.

63

Development professionals, including engineers, landscape architects, arborists, constructors and others involved in the process must communicate using clear, effective and common language and graphics to ensure that expectations for tree protection are understood and met. Doing so involves collaboratively creating and sharing reports, maps, drawings, sections and details and ensuring they are carefully reviewed and understood by all members of the team.

Planning Where tree preservation is an objective, good project design must consider existing trees from the initial planning stages. If trees are considered as an afterthought, the likelihood of successful preservation is significantly diminished. The following are steps to effectively plan for tree protection.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

Tree preservation cannot wait until construction

affect trees.

Projects must be planned and designed with tree preservation in mind, so that all parties involved in the project understand the requirements to successfully protect existing trees;

Proposing alternatives or modifications to development plans, if required

Evaluating the existing tree resource Evaluate the species, size, location, health and general condition of existing trees, in order to determine suitability for preservation, required arboricultural maintenance, and ability to withstand potential stressors associated with site development.

Understanding and assessing likely construction impacts During this stage, the project consultant responsible for tree protection (typically an arborist) should have a well-developed understanding of the project proposal, including the extent of proposed grading, excavation, infrastructure placement, and other factors which may

Where existing trees of significant size or value may be adversely affected by construction, modifications or alternatives to development plans should be considered at an early stage of the design process. Often, relatively simple and low-cost activities such as relocation of services or realignment of paved surfaces can make the difference between tree removal and preservation.

Specifying required tree/root protection zones (TPZ) A tree protection zone (TPZ) is an area around a tree or group of trees within which site disturbances such as grading, excavation, or other construction activities are not permitted. The appropriate size of a TPZ is difficult to determine; a common rule of thumb suggests that the area beneath the treeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s canopy (dripline) should be protected. However, this method can be problematic, particularly for trees with narrow canopies or restricted

City of Toronto Policy on Tree Protection Zones

Trunk Diameter (DBH)1

Minimum Protection Distances Required2 City-Owned and Private Trees

Minimum Protection Distances Required Trees in Areas Protected by the Ravine and Natural Feature Protection By-law Whichever of the two is greater:

< 10 cm

1.2 m

The drip line4 or 1.2 m

10-29 cm

1.8 m

The drip line or 3.6 m

30 -40 cm

2.4 m

The drip line or 4.8 m

41-50 cm

3.0 m

The drip line or 6.0 m

51-60 cm

3.6 m

The drip line or 7.2 m

61-70 cm

4.2 m

The drip line or 8.4 m

71-80 cm

4.8 m

The drip line or 9.6 m

81-90 cm

5.4 m

The drip line or 10.8 m

91-100 cm

6.0 m

The drip line or 12.0 m

> 100 cm

6 cm protection for each 1 cm of diameter

12 cm protection for each 1 cm diameter or the drip line5

3

Diameter at breast height (DBH) measurement of tree stem taken at 1.4 metres above the ground.

1

2

Tree Protection Zone distances are to be measured from the outside edge of the tree base.

3

Diameter (30 cm) at which trees qualify for protection under the private tree by-law.

4

The drip line is defined as the area beneath the outer most branch tips of a tree.

Converted from ISA Arborists' Certification Study Guide, general guideline for tree protection barriers of 1 foot of diameter from the stem for each inch of stem diameter.

5

64

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

If trees and TPZs are not appropriately depicted on relevant construction documents, such as grading plans, it is unlikely that they will be considered during site development. Their preservation should be considered a constraint, and must be adequately reflected as such.

The centreline of the tree stem (location), the general canopy outline (not a round circle), and the minimum required TPZ size should be located on tree protectionrelated plans.

Reporting

Toronto Tree Protection Zone (TPZ) warning sign.

rooting zones. If used to protect a broadly canopied tree with a wide-spreading root system, this guideline could still enable the removal of more than half of the treeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s roots.

Some studies have found that healthy, vigorous trees can tolerate the loss of between 30 and 50% of their roots. It must be noted that any depth of excavation has the potential to remove a significant amount of roots.

Excavation as deep as 30 cm may be as injurious as much deeper excavations.

Diameter at breast height (DBH) is used as the foundation for tree protection zone guidelines and specifications in the City of Toronto and most other Canadian municipalities with tree protection requirements.

The optimal TPZ will also consider the subject treeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s overall health, condition, and species tolerance for root zone disturbance. Current City guidelines do not require that these factors be considered during the planning of tree protection on construction sites.

Tree protection zones should be fenced-in, using solid plywood hoarding or equivalent material. In areas where visibility is a concern, framed construction fencing can be used. Hoarding should be firmly affixed to the ground to prevent movement by construction equipment or personnel.

Identifying trees and TPZs on all relevant documents

65

The above-noted activities and considerations should be summarized in a comprehensive yet concise report, made available to all parties involved in activities which may affect trees on the development site.

Pre-construction treatments Several treatments, undertaken prior to site development, can help to improve tree health and potentially increase tolerance to the effects of construction. Among these treatments include: Pruning Pruning should be undertaken prior to construction activity, if required, in order to reduce the potential for conflict with both planned structures and construction equipment. It is preferable to prune branches as necessary rather than correct limb fracture after the fact.

Pruning must be done by a qualified arborist, and not by construction personnel. Pruning for clearance purposes should be kept to the minimum required.

Structural Maintenance If required, structural maintenance such as cabling or bracing should be undertaken prior to commencement of construction in order to reduce the likelihood of failure during site works.

Irrigation Supplemental irrigation should be provided if trees may be drought stressed during construction. Irrigation should be heavy and thorough, and cover the entire tree

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

protection zone. It may be beneficial to irrigate trees several months in advance of construction to promote tree health during the construction period.

Fertilization Fertilization is rarely required, but should be provided if recommended by a soil analysis. Fertilizing trees a season prior to construction may be beneficial, but postconstruction fertilization should be modest if it is applied at all.

Pest and Disease Management Pest and disease issues should be monitored and controlled prior to and during construction, as increased stresses may predispose trees to decline. Of particular importance are defoliating pests, which could stimulate flushing of new foliage and cause trees to use stored carbohydrate resources, which should be reserved for replacing roots.

Mulching Applying mulch to a depth of 50-100 mm within the tree protection zone provides a favourable rooting environment. Mulching beyond the TPZ can reduce the effects of soil compaction.

Vegetation Retention/Removal Vegetation should be removed prior to construction and the installation of tree protection zones, unless its retention may help protect trees to be retained.

Design and implementation A number of design practices can reduce the adverse effects of site development on existing trees. These include: Grading Grading and associated activities cause the most serious and widespread damage to trees, predominantly by cutting roots and compacting soils. Considerations to reduce grading-related damage include:

66

Mulching added around the base of a mature tree.

• L imiting the extent of cutting in root zones to prevent root loss; • L imiting the extent of fill in root zones to prevent smothering, trunk decay and soil compaction; • Minimizing changes to drainage patterns in areas where mature trees are present and adapted to current conditions; • Reducing the construction of grade transitions in root zones. Where possible, retaining walls should be created to enable the retention of as large a root area as possible. Additionally, steeper grade transitions may enable the retention of larger rooting area, if trees are located upslope of the transition.

Utilities and services A wide range of utility services may be found belowground in urban areas, including sanitary and storm sewers, water services, telecommunications, hydro, gas, and others. Many factors will affect the location of a specific service relative to other utilities and infrastructure, as well as to existing trees. The most common method of utility installation is trenching, particularly when the surrounding area is not being disturbed through reconstruction. Trenching can cause serious injury to existing trees and roots, as they are typically severed and can be damaged well beyond the inner edge of the trench due to fracturing and tearing.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

An effective procedure to install utilities within tree root zones is to trench to the outer limit of the tree’s TPZ, continue with hand-digging, hydraulic or pneumatic excavation within the TPZ until roots greater than 25 mm in diameter are encountered, and then use trenchless installation techniques such as directional boring to route the utilities beneath or beside the tree. The appropriate trenchless method must be determined in consideration of factors such as pipe or conduit diameter, existing site soils, and proximity to trees. An alternative to trenchless techniques is to continue trenching using hydraulic or pneumatic excavation, leaving roots intact, and threading utilities through and between roots.

• P lacing heavy-load areas, which require thicker subbases, outside of tree protection zones • Wherever possible, utilizing “no-dig” designs by adjusting finish grades such that the pavement surface is above the surrounding grade, with appropriate grade transitions • Reinforcing the wearing surface and base layer of paving so that a compacted sub-base is not required to provide structural support • Using geotextile fabric beneath the pavement section to protect from displacement into soft uncompacted soils Monitoring, assessment and reporting

If trenching is unavoidable and roots must be removed, proper root pruning prior to trenching is an essential part of effective tree preservation. Roots should be exposed to a minimum depth of 60 cm by hand or using hydraulic or pneumatic excavation methods and properly pruned at right angles using a sharp pruning saw. Any damaged roots should also be properly pruned.

Any new above-ground utilities should be installed in consideration of the growing requirements of the tree canopy and stem.

Pavement installation Pavement installation may have a wide range of effects upon existing trees, ranging from the nearly negligible to causing complete mortality. The primary determinant of the extent of damage is the amount of sub-grade preparation required to install the pavement; deeper excavation will invariably result in more extensive root loss, while no-dig designs may entirely eliminate root damage. Extensive soil compaction is often required to support traditional paving installations – routing pavements outside of tree protection zones will reduce the impacts of sub-base preparation.

Key factors achieved by the tree planting technical solutions (See Section 4: Sidewalk Arrangements, and Appendix A: Construction Drawings) that reduce the impact of pavement installation on existing trees include: • U sing a pavement type with the thinnest possible section, which requires less excavation

67

Trees affected by construction may be at increased risk of mortality or failure. Tree mortality can be a gradual, long-term process, and is typically caused by adverse impacts to the root/soil system. Tree failure (i.e., uprooting or stem fracture) following construction typically occurs as a result of changes in wind dynamics due to site clearing.

An arborist should be on-site during and following construction to assess the potential impacts of construction and the likelihood that they may contribute to one or both of the mortality patterns described above.

Considerations for site and tree inspection during and following construction include (Coder, 1996): • Loss of rooting area and general damage to the root system • Damage to the root collar and structural roots • Mechanical injury to the stem • Changes in soil structure such as compaction, fill, erosion or loss of organic matter • Changes to wind loading in the crown • Damage to branches • Decline in overall health • Obstructions Assessment results should be compiled and presented in a post-construction arborist report. If required, the report should outline required remedial actions such as decompaction, irrigation, mulching, corrective pruning or other requirements.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

References Coder, K. 1996. Construction Damage Assessments: Trees and Sites. University of Georgia Cooperative Extension Service. Forest Resources Unit. FOR96-39.

University of Georgia: Athens, GA. Gilman, E. F. 1997. Trees for Urban and Suburban Landscapes. Delmar: Albany, NY. N. Matheny and J.R. Clark. 1998. Trees and Development: A technical guide to preservation of trees during land development. International Society of Arboriculture: Champaign, IL. Urban, J. 2008. Up by Roots: Healthy Soils and Trees in the Built Environment. International Society of Arboriculture: Champaign, IL.

68

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Horticultural Practices

7. Demonstration Projects The consultants and the City organized a soil cell testing exercise at the City of Toronto’s Nashdene Yard in Scarborough with utility stakeholders Toronto Water and Enbridge Gas. New utility installation and repair of existing utilities under soil cells was recreated at the Yard:

Nashdene Yard Soil Cell installation progress photos

7.1 Toronto Water utility access exercise: Toronto Water recreated an “emergency scenario” in the middle of winter (Feb. 24, 2012). The scenario involved bursting a water main and testing the effects of water leaking on the soil cell system.

Soil cell trench filled with soil

7.2 Enbridge Gas lateral line and riser installation: Enbridge Gas tested access through soil cells to install a gas lateral line.

7.3 Bloor St. W. at Dovercourt Rd. and Concord Ave. demonstration project: A further on-site demonstration project was proposed. However, it was decided not to be implemented as part of this study, due to a larger upcoming resurfacing project in the area.

Soil cell decking system.

Note: The soil cell product used at Nashdene Yard was Silva Cells, manufactured by DeepRoot Green Infrastructure, LLC.

ITE

ES RCIS

EXE TIFF IELD RD.

ARD ITY Y E N IL HDE FAC NAS & REC KS PAR

ENE

HD NAS

RD.

Nashdene Yard location, Scarborough.

69

B ackfill installation on top of deck.

Finished installation.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

7.1 Toronto Water Utility Access Exercise Description of the exercise The cold weather conditions, at -4°C (-10°C with wind chill) provided Toronto Water field personnel a good test for working with soil cells in adverse conditions.

demonstration sidewalk. After the water valve was shut off, the following activities took place: Concrete sidewalk pavement was removed

The exercise began at 8:00 am with an on-site briefing where the demonstration project coordinators and Toronto Water personnel discussed the different activities and the order of execution. Water was then turned on into the installed water pipe which was capped on both ends and pre-cut during its installation under the soil cell system. Water fed from a hydrant at 414 kPa ran for approximately three minutes before it started to come out through the already saturated soil adjacent to the

• Concrete

pavement was saw cut into blocks that could later be removed by a backhoe.

• Removal of concrete and granular ‘A’ base below concrete paving.

• Crew located a geotextile layer that was installed below the granular ‘A’ and on top of the soil cell top frame deck; the geotextile was cut to expose the soil cell deck.

• Manual removal of two of six soil cell top decks were set aside for re-installation.

Water pipe cut.

Sawcutting concrete pavement.

Water introduced - water bursting out of saturated soil adjacent to installation.

Mechanical removal of pavement to expose soil cell decking system.

70

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

Manual removal of two decks, unscrewed and set aside for future re-installation.

Excavation below bottom of soil cells to daylight water pipe.

Mechanical removal of soil cells.

Excavation below bottom of soil cells to daylight water pipe.

71

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

Mechanical removal of soil cells, soil and sub-base

Conclusions of the Toronto Water exercise

• B ackhoe was used to dig out and through soil cells and soil.

• Water pipe was daylighted.

Once the soil cells were removed, the stakeholders discussed the outcome and lessons learned from the exercise. It was concluded that Toronto Water can easily access its infrastructure through the soil cell system under extreme conditions using the same methods they currently have in place in either a planned or emergency situation. The exercise allayed their concerns that the soil cells would be a hindrance in their field work. Further discussions of a vertical minimum clearance between the utility and the bottom of the soil cells are expected.

Repair • T he dug trench was temporarily repaired afterwards with unshrinkable fill up to finished grade.

• Weeks later, unshrinkable fill was broken up to the bottom of the first layer of soil cells to restore the cells and surface finishes to the original condition.

STEP 1 Cover sides with a polyethylene film and fill with unshrinkable fill until 50mm below finished surface

STEP 2

Remove top of unshrinkable fill to the level of upper soil cell and restore soil cell trench and surface finishes

72

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

7.2 Enbridge Gas Lateral Line and Riser Installation Description of the exercise The exercise began at 9:00 am at Nashdene Yard in Scarborough on a late-May day that was partly cloudy and warm. A gas lateral with a long riser was installed under a sidewalk cross-section of unit paving and soil cells. Using a mole with the shortest torpedo hammerhead at 1 .0 m length, the 25 mm gas line was bored through the growing medium and adjacent subgrade.

Excavation was only necessary at each end of the gas lateral. For longer horizontal drilling, a directional drill is used which has greater directional control. Enbridge usually uses a torpedo mole for downtown work, which requires less excavation and can be used for horizontal drilling through sidewalk cross-sections. It can drill through tree roots and is only blocked by large rocks. The following took place:

Removal of pavers and granular base.

Setting the direction and starting point of the horizontal boring • Mock building and road sides of the sidewalk were designated for the purposes of this exercise.

• Unit pavers and granular base were removed to locate and confirm the cell deck edge. The torpedo was set to drill horizontally between the soil cell frame legs from the side.

• The crew dug down two cells deep between the building side and the cell, until there was enough room to slide the riser through. Where there is not enough room to dig behind the cell, the cell can be removed to install the riser.

• In alignment with the pit dug at the building end, another pit was dug down approximately 1.2m deep at the road end of the lateral.

Geotextile is cut through centre of cell deck.

Directional boring •

he torpedo was first set to begin at the building T side where the riser would be placed. The torpedo did not make it out at the road side because it had great difficulty going from soft material to hard material (i.e.. growing medium to hard clay subgrade) as it does not have enough friction to propel it forward.

• The torpedo was reset to begin on the road side. It

73

Digging down approximately two cells deep at both lateral ends.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

bored through the road subgrade then through the soft growing medium and came out at the building side.

Pulling the lateral through, attaching and setting the riser â&#x20AC;˘ The torpedo was removed and the lateral pipe was attached to the hose end and pulled through. â&#x20AC;˘ The riser was fused to the pipe end and pulled through and set at the correct elevation. â&#x20AC;˘ Granular was backfilled into the cavity.

Torpedo emerges through growing medium and cell decks on the imaginary building side.

Torpedo set to begin at the imaginary building end of the lateral line.

Torpedo and hose are pulled up and out of the pit.

74

After false start on imaginary building end, torpedo is reset at road end.

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

Pulling the lateral through the cells and growing medium.

End of lateral at building end.

Cover over the cell deck with the cut geotextile and add an overlapping layer of geotextile on top.

Riser is attached and pulled through.

Backfill and ensure riser is set correctly.

75

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

Conclusions of the Enbridge Gas exercise It was concluded that the soil cells pose no obstruction to the installation of a gas lateral and riser. The work is essentially the same as current sidewalk conditions with a few extra considerations. The crew must locate the boundary of the cell frame to set the torpedo to go between the cell deck legs and not collide into them. The crew must be mindful that the growing medium is easily permeable and that the torpedo bores move easily from hard to soft matter and not the other way around. Paving removal need only be limited to where the riser needs to go and the area needed to slide it into place. Where there is enough room between the soil cells and building face to excavate and install the riser, paving on top of the cells could stay intact.

76

Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

7.3 Bloor Street West at Dovercourt Rd. and Concord Ave. Demonstration Project A demonstration project was planned to test the typologies developed in this study under the sidewalk through a combined growing medium trench, structural pavement slab and soil cell condition along a short stretch of the north side of Bloor St. W. from Dovercourt Rd. to Concord Ave. It was decided by the City not to implement this demonstration exercise as part of the scope of this study. The City of Toronto is proposing a 3.5 km road resurfacing project along Bloor St. W. for 2013. To avoid any schedule disruption to the larger resurfacing project planned for Bloor St. W., the tree planting pilot project from Dovercourt Rd. to Concord Ave. will not be implemented.

Existing Enbridge temporary trench repair with unshrinkable fill and asphalt.

Con cord

erco d. ur t R Tree Planting Solutions for Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual / Demonstration Projects

.

D ov

77

Av e

.

St . W r o Blo

50 Park Road Toronto, Ontario M4W 2N5 T 416 968 9479 F 416 968 0687 www.dtah.com

Appendices

Tree Planting Solutions in Hard Boulevard Surfaces Best Practices Manual

Appendix A Construction Drawings Appendix B Construction Specifications Appendix C Cost Comparison Appendix D Nashdene Yard Demonstration Project Appendix E Bloor-Dovercourt Demonstration Project

| ARUP | James Urban - Urban Trees + Soils | Urban Forest Innovations Inc.

Appendix A

Construction Drawings

SHEET LIST

GENERAL NOTES

T-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH .1 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN .2 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WITH SOIL CELLS .3 TYPICAL SECTIONS .4 TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH PANEL 'B' @ TREE OPENING .5 TYPICAL SECTIONS WITH SOIL CELLS

1.

WHERE REQUIRED, 8.0m O.C. IS THE ABSOLUTE MINIMUM RECOMMENDED TREE SPACING.

2.

RECOMMENDED MINIMUM TREE OPENING SIZE IS 1.5m. USE ALTERNATIVE OPENING SIZE OF 1.2m IF CITY MINIMUM PEDESTRIAN CLEARWAY OF 1.7m CANNOT BE MAINTAINED.

3.

ABSOLUTE MINIMUM DEPTH OF GROWING MEDIUM BED IS THE DEPTH OF THE TREE'S ROOT BALL. ADEQUATE DEPTH RANGES FROM 1m TO 1.2m.

T-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS & UNIT PAVING OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH .1 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN .2 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WITH SOIL CELLS .3 TYPICAL SECTIONS .4 TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH PANEL 'B' @ TREE OPENING .5 TYPICAL SECTIONS WITH SOIL CELLS T-2: SOIL CELLS IN CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH .1 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WHERE LATERAL LINES RUN UNDER SIDEWALK .2 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WHERE MAIN LINES RUN UNDER SIDEWALK .3 TYPICAL SECTIONS @ MIDBLOCK .4 TYPICAL SECTIONS @ TREE OPENING T-3: OPEN PLANTER .1 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLANS .2 LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLANS WITH SOIL CELLS .3 TYPICAL SECTIONS .4 TYPICAL SECTIONS WITH SOIL CELLS TC: TYPICAL COMPONENTS -1 RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DETAILS -2 RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DETAILS -3 METAL PAVER EDGE DETAILS -4 ROOT ZONE ID & SOIL INSPECTION PORT DETAILS -5 CURB WITH DECORATIVE BAND OPTION DETAILS

MIN. OF GROWING MEDIUM PER TREE IS PROVIDED. MIN. OF GROWING MEDIUM PER TREE. 4.

INSTALL ONE ROOT ZONE ID PER TREE.

5.

FOR TREE OPENING MATERIAL, SEE PL-1.

6.

FOR NURSERY STOCK QUALITY & ACCEPTABLE TREE CONDITIONS, REFER TO BEST PRACTICES MANUAL SECTION 6.1.

7.

FOR TREE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, REFER TO DRAWING PL-1.

8.

FOR RAIN WATER DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS (DRAIN COVER, PIPES, INLETS) SEE SPECIFICATION.

9.

FOR GEOTEXTILE, SEE SPECIFICATION.

10.

FOR GEOGRID, SEE SOIL CELL SPECIFICATION.

11.

FOR UTILITY BREAKS IN SOIL CELLS, SEE MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS.

12.

PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF WORK, GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER TO CONFIRM THAT SITE CONDITIONS ARE SUITABLE FOR SPECIFIED DESIGN.

S: STRUCTURAL DESIGN -1 TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANEL -2 TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANEL -3 LIMITATIONS FOR CORING/SLEEVING & NOTCHING/BOX-OUTS PL: PLANTING DETAILS -1 TREE PLANTING DETAIL -2 GROWING MEDIUM DETAILS 50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

COVER SHEET

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

SHEET LIST & GENERAL NOTES

T-0

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: NTS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN

T-1A.1

SCALE: NTS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WITH SOIL CELLS

T-1A.2

SCALE: NTS

TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPICAL SECTIONS

SCALE: AS SHOWN

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

T-1A.3

LOCKING OF BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH PANEL 'B' @ TREE OPENING

SCALE: 1:30

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

T-1A.4

LOCKING OF BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPICAL SECTIONS WITH SOIL CELLS

SCALE: 1:30

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

T-1A.5

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS & UNIT PAVING OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN

T-1B.1

SCALE: NTS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS & UNIT PAVING OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WITH SOIL CELLS

T-1B.2

SCALE: NTS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS & UNIT PAVING OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTIONS

T-1B.3

SCALE: AS SHOWN

LOCKING OF BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS & UNIT PAVING OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTION THROUGH PANEL 'B' @ TREE OPENING

T-1B.4

SCALE: 1:30

LOCKING OF BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANELS & UNIT PAVING OVER CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTIONS WITH SOIL CELLS

T-1B.5

SCALE: 1:30

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-2: SOIL CELLS IN CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WHERE LATERAL LINES RUN UNDER SIDEWALK

T-2.1

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: NTS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-2: SOIL CELLS IN CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLAN WHERE MAIN LINES RUN UNDER SIDEWALK

T-2.2

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: NTS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-2: SOIL CELLS IN CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTIONS @ MIDBLOCK

T-2.3

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:30

BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-2: SOIL CELLS IN CONTINUOUS GROWING MEDIUM TRENCH

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTIONS @ TREE OPENING

T-2.4

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:30

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-3: OPEN PLANTER

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLANS

T-3.1

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:150

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-3: OPEN PLANTER

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LAYOUT & MATERIALS PLANS WITH SOIL CELLS

T-3.2

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:150

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-3: OPEN PLANTER

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTIONS

T-3.3

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:30

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPE-3: OPEN PLANTER

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPICAL SECTIONS WITH SOIL CELLS

T-3.4

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:30

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPICAL COMPONENTS

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DETAILS

TC-1

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:20

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPICAL COMPONENTS

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DETAILS

TC-2

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:10

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPICAL COMPONENTS

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

METAL PAVER EDGE DETAILS

TC-3

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: AS SHOWN

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPICAL COMPONENTS

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

ROOT ZONE ID & SOIL INSPECTION PORT DETAILS

TC-4

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: AS SHOWN

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

TYPICAL COMPONENTS

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

CURB WITH DECORATIVE BAND OPTION DETAILS

TC-5

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:10

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

STRUCTURAL DESIGN

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPE-1A: CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANEL

S-1

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:30

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

STRUCTURAL DESIGN

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

TYPE-1B: PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE PANEL

S-2

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:30

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

STRUCTURAL DESIGN

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

LIMITATIONS FOR CORING/SLEEVING & NOTCHING/BOX-OUTS

S-3

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

SCALE: 1:50

LOCKING OF BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

LOCKING OF BICYCLES PROHIBITED BICYCLES WILL BE REMOVED AT OWNER'S RISK

PLANTING DETAILS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

TREE PLANTING DETAIL

SCALE: NTS

PL-1

PLANTING DETAILS

50 Park Road Toronto, ON M4W 2N5 t: 416.968.9479

All dimensions are in millimetres unless otherwise noted.

Suite 2400 - 2 Bloor St. W. Toronto, ON M4W 1A8 t: 416.515.0915

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

915 Creek Drive Annapolis, MD 21403 t: 410.263.4838

UFI

1248 Minnewaska Trail Mississauga, ON L5G 3S5 t: 905.274.1022

3

2013-02-08

Best Practices Manual-100% Submission-R1

2

2012-07-31

Best Practices Manual - 100% Submission

1

2012-02-29

Issued for City Review - 90% Submission

No.

DATE

REVISIONS

GROWING MEDIUM DETAILS

SCALE: NTS

PL-2

Appendix B

Construction Specifications

Division 01 – General Requirements To be prepared per individual project by Consultant (NOT INCLUDED)

Division 03 – Concrete 03 20 00 03 45 00

Concrete Reinforcing Precast Architectural Concrete

Division 05 – Metals 05 50 00

Metal Fabrications

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements 32 32 32 32

84 10 88 88 91 21 93 00

Rain Water Distribution Soil Cells Growing Medium Planting

Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (provided by Province of Ontario) OPSS OPSS OPSS OPSS OPSS

510 909 919 1010 1860

Construction Specification for Removal Construction Specification for Prestressed Concrete – Precast Members Construction Specification for Formwork and Falsework Material Specification for Aggregates – Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, Backfill Material Specification for Geotextiles

City of Toronto Standard Construction Specifications (provided by City of Toronto) TS 3.70 TS 3.80 TS 1010

TS 1860

Construction Specification for Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Raised Median Construction Specification for Concrete Unit Pavers Amendments to OPSS 1010 (Apr 04) – Material Specification for Aggregates – Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material Amendments to OPSS 1860 (Mar 98) – Material Specification for Geotextiles

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

Part 1

General

1.1

RELATED SECTIONS .1

1.2

SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PAGE 1 OF 3

TS 3.70 Construction Specification for Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Raised Median MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES

.1

1.3

Measure reinforcing steel in tonnes of steel incorporated into Work, computed from theoretical unit mass specified in CAN/CSA-G30.18 for lengths and sizes of bars as indicated or authorized in writing by Engineer.

REFERENCES

.1

American Concrete Institute (ACI) .1

.2

American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1

.3

.2 .3 .4

CSA-A23.1-[04]/A23.2-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.

CSA-A23.3-04, Design of Concrete Structures.

CAN/CSA-G30.18-M92(R2002), Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, A National Standard of Canada.

CSA W186-M1990(R2002), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction.

Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada (RSIC) .1

1.4

ASTM A775/A775M-04a, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars.

Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1

.4

SP-66-04, ACI Detailing Manual 2004. .1 ACI 315-99, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ACI 315R-04, Manual of Engineering and Placing Drawings for Reinforced Concrete Structures.

RSIC-2004, Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice.

SUBMITTALS .1

Prepare reinforcement drawings in accordance with RSIC Manual of Standard Practice and ACI 315.

.2

Submit shop drawings including placing of reinforcement and indicate: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Bar bending details.

Lists.

Quantities of reinforcement.

Sizes, spacings, locations of reinforcement and mechanical splices if approved by Engineer, with identifying code marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings.

Indicate sizes, spacings and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .3

Provide type B tension lap splices at all splice locations indicated.

Quality Assurance: as described in PART 2 - SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL. .1 .2

1.5

PAGE 2 OF 3

Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CSA-A23.3, unless otherwise indicated. .1

.4

SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING

Mill Test Report: upon request, provide Engineer with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, minimum 4 weeks prior to beginning reinforcing work.

Upon request submit in writing to Engineer proposed source of reinforcement material to be supplied.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING .1

Waste Management and Disposal: .1

Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers.

Part 2

Products

2.1

MATERIALS .1

Substitute different size bars only if permitted in writing by Engineer.

.2

Reinforcing steel: billet steel, grade 400, deformed bars to CAN/CSA-G30.18, unless indicated otherwise.

.3

Reinforcing steel: weldable low alloy steel deformed bars to CAN/CSA-G30.18.

.4

Epoxy Coating of non-prestressed reinforcement: to ASTM A775/A775M.

.5

Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.6

Mechanical splices: subject to approval of Engineer.

2.2

FABRICATION .1

Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2 and Reinforcing Steel Manual of Standard Practice by the Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada.

.2

Obtain Engineer approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than those shown on placing drawings.

.3

Upon approval of Engineer, weld reinforcement in accordance with CSA W186.

.4

Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar bending details and lists. .1

2.3

Ship epoxy coated bars in accordance with ASTM A775A/A775M.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .1

Upon request, provide Engineer with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel, showing physical and chemical analysis, minimum 4 weeks prior to beginning reinforcing work.

.2

Upon request, inform Engineer of proposed source of material to be supplied.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES Part 3

Execution

3.1

FIELD BENDING

SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING PAGE 3 OF 3

.1

Do not field bend or field weld reinforcement except where indicated or authorized by Engineer.

.2

When field bending is authorized, bend without heat, applying slow and steady pressure.

.3

Replace bars, which develop cracks or splits.

3.2

PLACING REINFORCEMENT .1

Place reinforcing steel as indicated on placing drawings and in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2.

.2

Prior to placing concrete, obtain Engineer approval of reinforcing material and placement.

.3

Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour.

.4

Protect epoxy coated portions of bars with covering during transportation and handling.

3.3

FIELD TOUCH-UP .1

Touch up damaged and cut ends of epoxy coated reinforcing steel with compatible finish to provide continuous coating.

END OF SECTION 03 20 00

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - LANDSCAPE

PAGE 1 OF 5

Part 1 General 1.1

SECTION INCLUDES .1

1.2

SUBMITTALS .1

Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

.2

Shop Drawings: .1

Submit shop drawings.

.2

Include plans, sections and large scale details, and indicate components and methods of assembly, materials and their characteristics, fastenings, and their structural characteristics relative to their purpose, and other fabrication information required.

.3

Mock-ups: .1 Provide mock-up installations as directed by the City and conforming to typical construction for work of this section. .2 Mock-ups shall show the proposed colours and finishes, and other pertinent details of installation.

.4

Closeout submittals: .1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 77 00.

1.3

EXAMINATION .1

1.4

1.5

Labour, materials, tools, and equipment, required to supply and install precast concrete reglets.

Examine surfaces which are to receive the work of this Section and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Report defects of work prepared by other Sections which affect the work of this Section. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of surfaces and tolerances.

QUALIFICATIONS

.1

Work shall be executed only by a company with proven experience in the design and manufacture of architectural precast concrete and having adequate finances, equipment, plant and skilled personnel to expeditiously detail, fabricate and install the work of this Section as required by the Drawings and Specification.

.2

Manufacturer shall be responsible for the design, connections and installation of the precast concrete units and shall direct the placing of items to be cast in the concrete work.

.3

Manufacturer shall be qualified in accordance with CSA A23.4-00/A251 Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Architectural and Structural Precast Concrete.

DESIGN

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1

1.6

1.7

Part 2 2.1

SECTION 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - LANDSCAPE

PAGE 2 OF 5

Design of precast concrete members, connections and anchorages tied into the structure shall be carried out under the direction of a civil engineer experienced in the field and licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario, who shall seal each and every shop and erection drawing attesting to the adequacy of the members, their reinforcement and connections for the design and construction. This same design engineer shall provide both in-shop and on-site periodic review of the work during construction.

HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1

Design and cast lifting devices into the units to ensure that they will be safely and efficiently handled at times. Lifting devices shall be so arranged that they do not have to be removed, or if they must be removed, they shall be arranged so that they are readily filled by this Section.

.2

Stack units on properly cushioned supports to protect the edges.

.3

Do not permit units to contact earth or other staining influences or to rest on corners.

.4

Protect stockpiles against inclement weather.

.5

Protect holes and reglets against water and ice in freezing weather.

.6

Protect the work of other Sections during erection and final cleaning.

.7

Protect work while in progress. Protect work at openings and exposed corners where there is likelihood of damage with substantial non-staining coverings and remove up on completion of work of this trade.

WARRANTY .1

This Section shall produce precast units which will not spall or show evidence of visible cracking, rust, splitting, deformation, or loosening resulting from inferior materials or workmanship by this trade and upon completion of the work of this Subcontract, provide the City with a written labour and material warranty in which this Subcontractor shall undertake to correct faulty workmanship and to replace deteriorated or faulty materials which may develop or become apparent during warranty period, promptly upon notification by the City of such deterioration or faulty work.

.2

Provide standard warranty with a duration of two (2) years in accordance with General Conditions. Warranty shall be in writing and shall warrant work under this Section to be free from defects for the period stipulated.

Products MATERIALS .1

Precast concrete units: .1 .2

White cement, water reducer, air entrainment, aggregates, water admixture: to CSA A23.4/A251 and CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2.

Aggregate: in conformance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2, face mix aggregate as selected by the City, to match samples as provided by the City.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .3 .4

.5

.6 .7 .8

.9

2.2

SECTION 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - LANDSCAPE

PAGE 3 OF 5

Sand: silica or sandstone of approved source, as selected by the City.

Admixture: in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1-A23.2. Introduce admixtures to concrete at time of batching in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Under no circumstances, use calcium chloride on an admixture containing calcium chloride. Admixtures shall be subject to the approval of the City.

Reinforcing steel as required: billet steel bars conforming to CAN/CSA-G30.18.

Reinforcing larger than 6 mm dia. shall be deformed bars conforming to the same standard. Welded wire mesh shall conform to CSA G30.5. Galvanize reinforcing with less than 25 mm cover.

Water: in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2.

Structural steel: new material conforming to CSA G40.20, or ASTM Designation A36M. Concrete mix: .1 Use concrete mix designed to produce minimum of 35 MPa compressive strength at 28 days, with a maxiumum water/cement ration to CSA A23.4-00/A251. .2 Use same brand and source of cement and aggregate for facing, for entire project to ensure uniformity of colouration and other mix characteristics. .3 Cement colour in facing matrix to be determined by the City. .4 Air entrainment of concrete mix: to CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2, 5% minimum. .5 Use of calcium chloride not permitted.

Forms: constructed or approved concrete, steel or fiberglass reinforced plastic or high density overlaid plywood conforming to CSA O121 to obtain the quality of the finish specified.

FABRICATION .1

Exposed faces of precast concrete members shall be made to requirements of CSA A23.4/A251, Finish Grade ‘A’.

.2

Precast concrete exposed surface finish shall match approved samples. Colour and texture shall be uniform and consistent throughout, free from air pockets, imperfections, blemishes and discolourations.

.3

Fabricate units to profiles and sizes detailed and in accordance with shop drawings and to requirements of local authority having jurisdiction over work.

.4

Execute work accurately, true to dimensions, square, in true planes, free from waves, twists, cracks, checks and broken edges. Warped, cracked, chipped or broken units shall not be placed in work. Edges shall be straight and with clean accurate arises.

.5

Quality of concrete, placing materials in forms, vibrating, curing, stripping and handling shall be in accordance with CSA A23.4-00/A251-00 and this Standard shall apply to precast concrete units required under this Section.

.6

Fabricate precast work within dimensional tolerances as specified in CSA A23.4-00/A251.

.7

Identify precast units with a number on back face as well as mark identifying orientation of unit in final position.

.8

Curing shall be in accordance with the requirements of CSA A251.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - LANDSCAPE

PAGE 4 OF 5

Part 3 Execution 3.1

DESIGN .1

3.2

DIMENSIONS .1

3.3

3.4

3.5

Design precast concrete work and connections in accordance with CSA A23.4/A251and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Check dimensions at site before commencing shop drawings and before fabrication and report discrepancies to the City.

INSTALLATION .1

Erect precast concrete units in accordance with CSA A23.4-00/A251-00 and this Standard shall apply to precast concrete units required under this section.

.2

Apply setting adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3

Set work plumb, true and square with joints parallel and uniform. Set elevations and alignment between units to within allowable tolerances before connecting units.

.4

Where tolerances will interfere with work of other sections that will force other work to be out of plumb, level, or deviate from straight lines indicated, provide remedial work for this defect.

.5

Install each precast concrete unit in a way to permit removal and replacement of a defective and condemned panel without damaging adjacent panels.

.6

Supply adequate information on handling and installation methods.

REJECTION OF WORK .1

Any concrete units containing concrete which have failed to meet strength requirements of plans and specification shall be cored as directed by the City. Unit may be rejected and replaced at the Cityâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s discretion after core test. Units fabricated out-of-square, out-ofdimension, without proper reinforcement, proper opening or inserts, shall be rejected and replaced at the Cityâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s discretion. The costs of these tests shall be borne by this Section.

.2

Damaged, chipped, rust stained, and discoloured units shall be replaced, patched or refinished as directed by the City. The City will be the sole judge of the acceptance of any patched, repaired or refinished panels.

.3

Except for hair cracks which are defined as surface cracks of minute width, visible but not measurable by ordinary means, units which have become cracked or broken will be rejected and shall be replaced.

CLEAN-UP .1

Remove, as work progresses, excess or foreign materials which would set up or become

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 03 45 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE - LANDSCAPE

PAGE 5 OF 5

difficult to remove from finished surfaces. .2

At completion, clean exposed surfaces of precast units. Remove dirt and other extraneous matter. Do not use acids without the Cityâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s acceptance.

.3

Take precautions to prevent staining the material of others during cleaning operations.

END OF SECTION 03 45 00

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SECTION INCLUDES .1

1.2

1.3

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .1

1.4

Work of this section includes metal fabrications and related metals including, but not limited to, the following: .1 Galvanized steel plate, 12 mm thick.

RELATED SECTIONS Section 01 10 00 - General Instructions.

Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

Section 32 14 14 – Precast Concrete Unit Pavers TS 3.70 – Construction Specification for Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Raised Median OPSS 909 – Construction Specification for Prestressed Concrete – Precast Members REFERENCES The standards referenced in this section are to the following editions: .1 AAMA 611-98 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. .2 ANSI H35.1-06 – American National Standard Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum (U.S. & Metric Units). .3 ASTM A167-99(2004) – Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, and Strip. .4 ASTM A269-04 – Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. .5 ASTM A276-06 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. .6 ASTM A307-04 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. .7 ASTM B32-94 – Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .8 ASTM B663-96(2006) – Standard Specification for Silver-Tungsten Carbide Electrical Contact Material. .9 CAN/CSA G164-M81 – Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .10 CAN/CSA-S16.1-94 - Limit States Design of Steel Structures. .11 CSA W47.1-03 – Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .12 CSA W47.2-M1987(R2003)– Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Aluminum. .13 CSA W55.3-1965 – Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. .14 CSA W59-03 – Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .15 CSA W59.2-M1991(R2003) – Welded Aluminum Construction.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1

.2

General: the work of this section shall be executed only by a Subcontractor who has adequate plant, equipment, and skilled tradespersons to perform work expeditiously, and is known to have been responsible for satisfactory installations similar to that required in the Work during a period of at least the immediate past 5 years.

Welding: .1 Weld structural components in steel to conform to requirements of CSA W59, and by a fabricator fully certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to conditions

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

.2

resist

.3

Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 2

of CSA W47.1 and W55.3 as applicable.

Weld components in aluminum to conform to requirements of CSA 59.2, and by a fabricator certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to conditions of CAN/CSA W47.2.

Requirements of regulatory agencies: the work of this section that functions to

forces imposed by dead and live loads shall conform to requirements of jurisdictional authorities. .4 Conduct a pre-installation meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19.

1.5

SUBMITTALS .1 .2

.3

.4

1.6

Submit required submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

Product data sheets: .1 Submit manufacturer’s Product data sheets for Products proposed for use in the work of this section. .2 Submit WHMIS data sheets for applied finish coatings.

Shop Drawings: .1 Submit engineered shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .3 Include plans, sections and large scale details, and shall indicate components and methods of assembly, materials and their characteristics, fastenings, metal finishes, welds, and their structural characteristics relative to their purpose, and other fabrication information required. .4 Indicate proposed site connections and methods. .5 Indicate metal finishes. .6 Indicate grain direction for stainless steel work.

Mock-ups .1 Provide mock-ups for the following items: .1 Galvanized Steel paver edge.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS .1 .2

Design, fabricate, and install in accordance with the building code and requirements of all other governing authorities.

Design assemblies and connections to withstand own dead load, super-imposed dead loads, and fabrication forces, without permanent distortions or deformation, to maximum allowable deflection of L/360, within the following construction tolerances: .1 Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines: .1 3.2 mm (1/8”) in 3 m (10 ft) .2 Maximum variation from level: .1 3.2 mm (1/8”) in 9 m (30 ft.). .3 Maximum variation from straight: .1 3.2 mm (1/8”) in 3 m (10 ft.) under a 3 m (10 ft.) straight edge. .4 Maximum variation from angle indicated: .1 10 seconds. .5 Tolerances shall be non-cumulative.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES 1.7

1.8

.1 .2 .3

Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 3

WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 47 15.

Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.

Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Label, tag or otherwise mark metal fabrications supplied for installation by other sections to indicate its function, location in building and shop drawing designation. .2 Protect work from damage during delivery, storage and handling. .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering. .3 Deliver work to location at the Place of the Work designated by Contractor and to meet requirements of construction schedule. .1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS .1

.2

General: .1 Unless detailed or specified otherwise, standard Products will be acceptable if construction details and installation meet intent of the Contract Documents. .2 Include materials, products, accessories, and supplementary parts necessary to complete assembly and installation of work of this section. .3 Incorporate only metals that are free from defects that are visible, or that impair strength or durability. Install only new metals of best quality, and free from rust or waves and buckles, and that are clean, straight, and with sharply defined profiles.

Metals: .1 Steel materials: .1 Steel, structural shapes, plate, bars: hot-rolled, to meet specified requirements of CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 300W. .2 Steel, hollow structural sections: hot-formed, seamless, to meet specified requirements of CAN/CSA-G40.21, Grade 350W, Class H. .3 Steel, sheet: cold rolled, stretcher levelled, fully pickled, to meet specified requirements of ASTM A366 or SAE Specification 1010. .4 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade A or B, standard weight, Schedule 40 seamless black or AISI MT 1010/1015, or acceptable alternative. .2 Stainless steel materials: .1 Stainless steel tubing: to ASTM A269, Type 316, Type 316L at welded fabrications, Commercial Grade, seamless welded. .2 Stainless steel sheet and plate: ASTM A167, Type 316, Type 316L at welded fabrications. .3 Stainless steel sheet: AISI Type 316, Type 316L at welded fabrications). .4 Stainless steel bar and angle: ASTM A276, Type 316, Type 316L at welded fabrications. .3 Aluminum materials: .1 Aluminum extrusions: ASTM B211, Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T6 or 6061-T6. .2 Aluminum sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 1100, 3003 or 5005. For anodized finish is required use Alloy 5005.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .3

2.1

.1

.2

.3

Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 4

Finishes: .1 Galvanizing; hot dip after fabrication metal work: for irregular sections, zinc coating to meet specified requirements of CAN/CSA-G164. Use air cooling method (no water or chromate dipping treatment permitted). .2 Stainless steel: .1 Typical: AISI No. 4 brushed finish, grain direction as indicated on drawings. Where grain direction is not indicated, verify with Consultant prior to fabrication. .2 Heavy sandblasted finish: Submit samples showing a range of sandblasting coarseness for approval/selection by Consultant. .3 Aluminum: .1 Unexposed and exposed: Clear anodized to AAMA 611, designation AA-M10C22A41. .4 Fastenings: .1 ASTM A307, Type 304 stainless steel. .5 Welding materials: .1 Steel: to CAN/CSA W59. .2 Aluminum: to CAN/CSA W59.2. .6 Grout: .1 Epoxy grout: non-shrink, non-expanding, 'Sikadur Injection Gel Fast-Set' as manufactured by Sika Canada Inc., HY-150 as manufactured

by Hilti, REZIWELD 3/2 EPOXY GROUT/PATCH by W.R. Meadows, or approved alternative.

FABRICATION General: .1 Fabricate metal fabrications with machinery and tools specifically designed for the intended manufacturing processes and by skilled tradesmen. .2 Fit and assemble metal fabrications in shop. When this is not possible, make a trial shop assembly. .3 Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 and CSA W59.2, as applicable, unless specified otherwise.

Construction: .1 Fabricate with materials, component sizes, metal gauges, reinforcing, anchors, and fasteners of adequate strength to withstand intended use, and within allowable design factors imposed by jurisdictional authorities. Fabricate items from steel unless otherwise noted. .2 Ensure that metal fabrications will remain free of warping, buckling, opening of joints and seams, distortion, and permanent deformation. .3 Provide drainage holes at exterior exposed tubular fabrications to permit drainage of trapped moisture.

Assembly: .1 Accurately cut, machine and fit joints, corners, copes and mitres so that junctions between components fit together tightly and in true planes. .2 Fasten work with concealed methods unless otherwise indicated. .3 Weld connections where possible, bolt where not possible, and cut off bolts flush with nuts. Countersink bolt heads, and incorporate method to prevent loosening of nuts. Ream holes drilled for fastenings. .4 Provide continuous welds, where exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

Weld and grind welds to provide flat flush and finish to match adjacent finish,

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

.4

.5

Section 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS Page 5

where exposed to view. .5 Allow for differential movements within assemblies and at junctions of assemblies with surrounding Work.

Finish work: .1 Incorporate holes and connections for work installed under other sections. .2 Cleanly and smoothly finish exposed edges of materials including holes. .3 Cap open ends of sections exposed to view, such as pipes, channels, angles, and other similar work. .4 For welded stainless steel fabrications continuous weld, grind welds smooth and flat where exposed to view and polish to match metal finish.

Galvanizing: .1 Galvanize metal fabrications following fabrication.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

.1 .2 .3

3.2

ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING .1 .2

3.3

INSTALLATION Install metal fabrications plumb, true, square, straight, level, and accurately and tightly fitted together and fit to surrounding work.

Make field connections with bolts or weld as indicated to CAN/CSA-S16.1.

Attach metal fabrications with mechanical fasteners to support load with minimum safety factor of 3.

.1 .2

After erection, touch up finished surfaces that are burned, scratched or otherwise damaged.

Remove damaged, dented, defaced, defectively finished, or tool marked components and replace with new.

PROTECTION Maintain protection of work of this section from time of installation until final finishes are applied or to final cleanup.

Protect finished surfaces from damage.

END OF SECTION 05 50 00

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 84 10 RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 4

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

WORK INCLUDES .1

The work consists of installing precast concrete reglets, catch basin, cast iron drain cover, inlets and pipes for a passive watering system to irrigate tree roots.

.2

The construction of the watering system will include furnishing, installing and testing of all irrigation equipment, along with the restoration of the site to its original condition.

RELATED WORK .1

Section 03 45 00.02 Precast Architectural Concrete - Landscape

.2

Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

.3

Section 32 91 21 Growing Medium

.4

Section 32 93 00 Planting

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP .1

Engage an experienced installed with minimum five (5) yearsâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; experience with work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this Project.

.2

All materials will be new and without flaws or defects.

.3

All materials will be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year against material defects and workmanship.

SUBMITTALS .1

1.5

1.6

Prior to construction, submit samples, product data and descriptive literature for all materials that will be used on the project. Submittals must be approved by the City before construction begins.

MOCK-UP OF SYSTEM .1

The installer shall prepare an operational mock-up of the rain water distribution system that shall be completed in two stages. The mock-up must be completed and reviewed by the City before construction can begin.

.2

Stage 1 shall consist of one rain water distribution closed loop. The loop shall be installed as specified. The piping network shall be visible for inspection by the City. The contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system by filling the rain water distribution system with water to the point where water flows out the upper holes.

.3

Stage 2 will consist of one finished rain water distribution closed loop that is connected to the drain inlet and catch basin and covered by soil and the finished surface.

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

1.7

SECTION 32 84 10 RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PAGE 2 OF 4

.1

Upon completion and approval of work by the City, prepare an as-built drawing of the system indicating the pipe size and location and dimensioned location of buried sleeves and pipes.

.2

The as-built drawing will be drawn to scale.

UTILITIES .1

The Installing Contractor shall be aware of all public utilities servicing the property, and provide written notation pertaining to all private utilities located on the property.

.2

The Contractor shall notify the utility companies and arrange for cable locations prior to the commencement of any work, and shall be responsible for any damage to the public and private utilities described above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

2.2

PIPE .1

Identification: All pipe will be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer’s name or trademark, size, schedule and type of pipe, and working pressure at 21 degrees Celsius.

.2

Delivery: Plastic pipe will be delivered to the site and stored in such a manner to provide adequate protection for the pipe ends either threaded or plain.

.3

P.V.C. Pipe and Fittings: All P.V.C. pipe will be class 160 (SDR-26) Ø100mm direct burial pipe and will be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, dents, holes or foreign materials. All plastic pipe fittings to be installed shall be a minimum of schedule 40 molded fittings manufactured of the same material as the pipe and shall be suitable for solvent weld, slip joint ring tight seal. For bends, fittings shall be long sweep elbows. Tee fittings shall be sanitary tees.

.4

Approved suppliers: Martek Corp Inc.; Greenleaf Products. Alternates must be approved by the City.

.5

After installation, on upper side of pipe, drill ninety (90) Ø6.35mm (gauge E) holes along length of pipe loop. Evenly space the holes.

GEOTEXTILE .1

2.3

2.4

Geotextile per OPSS 1860 / City of Toronto Specification TS 1860.

CATCH BASIN .1

Approved product: F-900 IN-LINE CATCH BASIN, manufactured by ACO. Catch basin to include F900 black powdercoated catch basin frame and Series 900 plastic trash bucket.

Alternates must be approved by the City.

.2

Perforate the catch basin to connect the outlet pipe, per manufacturer’s specification.

DRAIN COVER

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1

2.5

Custom cast iron drain cover, or approved equal: per detail drawings. Submit shop drawings indicating tamper-proof fasteners to be used. Ensure that cover fits into catch basin frame.

WATERING/AERATION INLET .1

2.6

SECTION 32 84 10 RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PAGE 3 OF 4

Approved supplier: 100mm inlet by Martek Corp Inc., or Greenleaf Products. Alternates must be approved by the City.

PRECAST CONCRETE REGLET .1

Custom precast concrete reglet per detail drawings and specification. Submit shop drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

.1

Plastic pipes will be installed in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the manufacturer.

.2

All plastic to plastic joints will be solvent-weld joints or slip seal joints. Only the solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer shall be used. All plastic pipe and fittings will be installed as outlined and instructed by the pipe manufacturers.

.3

Pipe layout to be per drawings.

.4

The 100mm perforated pipe shall be installed so that it is level and on the surface of the final finished grade of growing medium.

.5

Ensure that holes in pipe are on top side of pipe and not the bottom.

.6

The bottom of the 100mm perforated pipe shall be no more than 50mm higher than the bottom elevation of the 100mm PVC header pipe. The tolerance for this dimension shall be 50mm +0mm/-6mm.

.7

Place geotextile on top of the perforated pipe.

CATCH BASIN .1

3.2

DRAIN COVER .1

3.3

Fasten drain cover with tamper-proof fasteners onto concrete shoulders/base per drawings.

WATERING/AERATION INLET .1

3.4

Install catch basin and components per layout plans and details. Catch basin to be cast into concrete, per drawings and manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specification.

Install watering/aeration inlet per layout plans and manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specification. Connect to perforated PVC pipe.

PRECAST CONCRETE REGLET .1

Install precast concrete reglet where shown in layout plans. Set into high performance mortar and ensure top of reglet is flush with adjacent finished grade.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 84 10 RAINWATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PAGE 4 OF 4

PART 4 - TESTING AND INSPECTION 4.1

4.2

TESTING .1

Flush all lines and ensure that all silt is expelled from the system.

.2

Inspect all visible piping, and walk all buried lines for any leakage.

.3

Any repairs necessary to render the system in good working order will be completed prior to covering with soil or paving.

INSPECTION .1

The system will not be considered complete and in compliance with the intent of these specifications and design until inspected by the Ownerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Representative.

END OF SECTION 32 84 10

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 1 OF 12

Part 1- General 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS .1

1.2

1.3

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

RELATED SECTIONS .1 Section 32 91 21 Growing Medium .2

Section 32 93 00 Tree Planting

.3

Section 32 84 10 Rainwater Distribution System

.4

OPSS 1010 Material Specification for Aggregates â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, Backfill

.5

OPSS 1860 Material Specification for Geotextiles

.6

TS 1010 Amendments to OPSS 1010

.7

TS 1860 Amendments to OPSS 1860

SUMMARY .1 Contractors must provide trees with the specified net soil volume within a structured rooting space provided by the soil cell system. .2

Section Includes: .1

1.4

Furnishing and installing soil cell system, geotextile, geogrids, sub base material, backfill, drainage system, root barrier, and mulch, and the installation of Growing Medium.

DEFINITIONS .1 Aggregate Sub Base (below soil cells): Aggregate material between the bottom of the soil cell frame and the compacted subgrade below, designed to distribute loads from the frame to the subgrade. .2

Aggregate Base Course (above cell deck): Aggregate material between the paving and the top of the soil cell deck below designed to distribute loads across the top of the deck.

.3

Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation beside the soil cell to the excavation extents.

.4

Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of Growing Medium or paving.

.5

Geogrid: Net-shaped synthetic polymer-coated fibers that provide a stabilizing force within soil structure as the fill interlocks with the grid and as defined in Part 2 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Products.

.6

Geotextile: A geosynthetic fabric, applied to either the soil surface or between materials, providing filtration, separation, or stabilization properties.

.7

Growing Medium: Soil as defined in Section "Growing Medium" intended to fill the soil cell system and other planting spaces.

.8

Root Barrier: Plastic root diversion device.

.9

Root package: The earthen package containing the root system of the tree as shipped from the nursery.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

1.5

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 2 OF 12

.10

Soil Cells: Structural system designed to be filled with Growing Medium for tree rooting and support of vehicle loaded pavements.

.11

Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill.

.12

Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

SUBMITTALS .1 Environmental Requirements and Procedures .1

Comply with all requirements and procedures in Section 01 35 43 Environmental Requirements and Procedures. .1

Submit materials water management plan that describes how materials will be managed at the site to prevent erosion and siltation from stored materials in accordance with Section 01 35 43 Environmental Requirements and Procedures paragraph Water Management, and General Construction Materials (Non Hazardous Materials)

.2

Submit testing data, waste material disposal plan for disposal of all excavated soil and fill material in accordance with Section 01 35 43 Environmental Requirements and Procedures, paragraph Waste Management.

.3

Submit letters and certificates of approval certifying that all fill material, including all aggregates and backfills meet the requirements of Sections 01 35 43 Environmental Requirements and Procedures, paragraph General Construction Materials (Non Hazardous Materials) and Fill Materials.

.4

Submit letters of compliance that all contractors and subcontractors are in compliance with the provisions of Section 01 35 43 Environmental Requirements and Procedures, paragraph Environmental Management Plan, and Environmental Awareness Training.

.2

Upon seven (7) days prior to start of installation of items in this section, the Contractor shall provide submittals required in this section to the City for review and approval.

.3

Shop Drawings: Provide drawings signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the Province of Ontario.

.4

Product Data: For each type of product, submit manufacturer's product literature with technical data sufficient to demonstrate that the product meets these specifications.

.5

Samples for Verification: For each product where noted in the specification, submit samples as described.

.6

Compaction testing results: Submit results of all compaction testing required by the specifications including the bulk density test of the mock up and installed soil, and the compaction testing log of penetrometer and moisture meter readings to the City for approval.

.7

Qualification Data: Submit documentation of the qualifications of the soil cell installer sufficient to demonstrate that the installer meets the requirements of paragraph "Quality Assurance".

.8

Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following:

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1 .2 1.6

1.7

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 3 OF 12

Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

Soil cell manufacturer's letter of review and approval of the project, plans, details and specifications for compliance with product installation requirements.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING .1 General: Prior to the start of Work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades. .2

Schedule all utility installations prior to beginning work in this section.

.3

Where possible, schedule the installation of soil cells after the area is no longer required for use by other trades and work. Protect installed soil cells from damage in the event that work must occur over or adjacent to the completed soil cells.

QUALITY ASSURANCE .1 Installer Qualifications: Soil cells and related products shall be installed by a qualified installer whose work has resulted in successful installation of Growing Mediums and planter drainage systems, underground piping, chambers and vault structures. .1

.2

Submit list of completed projects of similar scope and scale to the City, demonstrating capabilities and experience. .2 The installer and the field supervisor shall have a minimum of five years successful experience with construction of similar scope in dense urban areas. .3 Installer's Field Supervision: Installer is required to maintain an experienced fulltime supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. This person shall be identified during the Pre-installation Conference, with appropriate contact information provided, as necessary. The same supervisor shall be utilized throughout the Project, unless a substitution is submitted to and approved in writing by the City. .4 Installer will be required to take part in a half-day training session provided by the manufacturer. Training session to be attended by all foremen and key personnel involved in installation. Manufacturer will provide additional training during mockup installation Provide mock up of soil installation and compaction evaluation: .1 .2

.3

.3

Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: .1 .2

.4

Prior to the installation of soil cells, construct a mock up of the complete installation at the site. The installation of the mock up shall be in the presence of the City.

The mock up shall be a minimum of 10 square meters and include the complete soil cell system installation with sub base compaction, drainage installation, base course aggregate and geotextile as required, geogrids, backfill, Growing Medium with compaction, and top geotextile.

The mock up area may remain as part of the installed work at the end of the Project provided that it remains in good condition and meets requirements of the Contract Documents.

Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.

Soil cell manufacturer's letter of review and approval of the project, plans, details and specifications for compliance with product installation requirements.

Quality control required.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1

.2 .5

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 4 OF 12

The contractor shall, engage the soil cell manufacturer to provide shop drawings, stamped by a Ontario licensed professional engineer, and to provide periodic construction review by a Ontario licensed professional engineer, in order to ensure that the soil cells are constructed in accordance with the construction documents.

The soil cell Ontario Professional Engineer responsible for the periodic review of the installation shall attend the pre-installation meeting.

Conduct a pre-installation meeting.

1.8

LAYOUT AND ELEVATION CONTROL .1 Provide layout and elevation control during installation of soil cells. Utilize grade stakes, benchmarks, surveying equipment and other means and methods to assure that layout and elevations conform to the layout and elevations indicated on the plans.

1.9

PERMITS AND CODE COMPLIANCE .1 Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, Provincial and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary permits/approvals from all such authorities.

1.10

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1 Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while on the project site. .2

Bulk Materials: Do not deliver or place backfill, soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. .1 .2

.3

Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, and walkways. Provide additional sediment control to retain excavated material, backfill, soil amendments and planting mix within the project limits as needed.

.4

Soil cells: Protect soil cells from damage during delivery, storage and handling. .1 .2

1.11

Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, or on existing trees, turf areas or plants.

Provide protection including tarps, plastic and or matting between all bulk materials and any finished surfaces sufficient to protect the finish material.

Store under tarp to protect from sunlight when time from delivery to installation exceeds one week. Storage should occur on smooth surfaces, free from dirt, mud and debris.

Handling is to be performed with equipment appropriate to the size (height) of Cells and site conditions, and may include, hand, handcart, forklifts, extension lifts, small cranes, etc., with care given to minimize damage to soil cells.

Backhoes, front-end loaders and skid steers are considered inappropriate for soil cell transport and placement.

PROJECT CONDITIONS .1 Verification of Existing Conditions and Protection of New or Existing Improvements: Before proceeding with work in this section, the Installer shall carefully check and verify all

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 5 OF 12

dimensions, quantities, and grade elevations, and inform the City immediately of any discrepancies. .1

.2

Carefully examine the civil, record, and survey drawings to become familiar with the existing underground conditions before digging. Verify the location of all aboveground and underground utility lines, infrastructure, other improvements, and existing trees, shrubs, and plants to remain including their root system, and take proper precautions as necessary to avoid damage to such improvements and plants.

In the event of conflict between existing and new improvements notify the City in writing and obtain written confirmation of any changes to the work prior to proceeding. .1 When new or previously existing utility lines are encountered during the course of excavation, notify the City in writing and make recommendations as to remedial action. Proceed with work in that area only upon approval of appropriate remedial action. Coordinate all work with the appropriate utility contractors, utility company or responsible public works agency.

.2

Weather Limitations: Do not proceed with work when subgrades, soils and Growing Mediums are in a wet, muddy or frozen condition.

.3

Where construction sequencing requires work during cold weather, protect sub grades and bulk materials from freezing using covers or as needed heated tenting. Sub grades that are sufficiently well drained to preclude the buildup of ice may be installed and built upon during freezing weather provided the surface is cleared of snow and any ice bound material.

.4

Protect partially completed soil cell installation against damage from other construction traffic when work is in progress, and following completion with highly visible construction tape, fencing, or other means until construction is complete. Prevent all non-installation related construction traffic over the completed soil cell installation; only allowing loads less than the design loads.

1.12

PROTECTION .1 Protect open excavations and partially completed Soil Cell installation from access and damage when work is in progress, and following completion with highly visible construction tape, fencing, or other means until all construction is complete.

1.13

WARRANTY .1 Soil cell manufacturer's product warranty shall apply. Submit manufacturer's product warranty. .2

Warranty for other products and installation of soil cells in this section shall be as described in Division 1.

1.14

PROJECT WORK .1 Coordinate installation with all other work that may impact the completion of the work.

1.15

PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING .1 Prior to the start of the installation of soil cells, meet at the site with the City, general contractor and the soil cells installer to review installation layout, procedures, means and methods.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 6 OF 12

Part 2 - Products 2.1

SOIL CELLS .1 Structural system designed to be filled with Growing Medium for tree rooting and support of vehicle loaded pavements meeting the following requirements: .1 .2

.3 .4

.5

2.2

INSPECTION RISER AND CAP .1 Inspection riser shall consist of a rigid, schedule 40 non-perforated 100mm +/- diameter PVC pipe. .2

2.3

The structure shall be designed to support loads up to and including AASHTO H20 and Relevant Ontario Building Code standards for sidewalks.

The structures shall be designed to be filled with the growing medium as specified in section 32 91 21 â&#x20AC;&#x153;Growing Mediumâ&#x20AC;? including the type of soil specified; the required limitations of delivery, storage, and handling; the requirement to retain soil peds; and requirements to compact and in-situ test soil compaction to the ranges specified.

The soil cells shall have been specifically designed and tested for the purpose of growing tree roots, and rainwater filtering, detention and retention.

Critical to the soil cell design is that each soil cell or stack of soil cells shall be structurally independent of all adjacent soil cell stacks such that a single stack or group of stacks can be removed after the completion of installation to facilitate future utility installation and repair.

The structural design of each Soil Cell unit shall facilitate the movement of roots and water between each cell and between the edges of the cell system and the surrounding soils. The design shall facilitate the installation, compaction and insitu soil compaction testing; installation and maintenance of utilities within and under the soil cells; the movement and expansion of roots; and the lateral capillary movement of water.

Cap shall be cast iron clean out caps with screw top and inset lug designed to fit standard PVC schedule 40 pipe-fittings.

GEOGRID .1 Geogrid shall be high strength, high tenacity, high molecular weight polyester with the following properties: Ultimate Wide Width Tensile Strength Creep Reduced Strength Long Term Design Strength

29.2 kN/m 18.5 kN/m 16.0 kN/m

2.4

GEOTEXTILE .1 Refer to Class II non-woven geotextile per OPSS 1860.

2.5

AGGREGATE SUB BASE (BELOW CELL FRAME): .1 19mm crusher run limestone per TS 1010.

2.6

AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (ABOVE CELL DECK): .1 19mm crusher run limestone per TS 1010.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 7 OF 12

2.7

BACKFILL MATERIAL (ADJACENT TO SOIL CELLS): .1 Refer to OPSS 1010. Clean, compactable, coarse grained fill soil meeting the requirements of the Unified Soil Classification system for soil type GW, GP, GC with less than 30% fines, SW, and SC with less than 30% fines. Backfill material shall be free of organic material, trash and other debris, and shall be free of toxic material injurious to plant growth.

2.8

GROWING MEDIUM - (See Specification Section - Growing Medium)

2.9

ROOT BARRIER .1 Root barrier shall prevent root penetration. The material shall be impermeable and ribbed with a thickness of 1mm to 2mm. The root barrier shall be the full depth of the soil cells.

Part 3 - Execution 3.1

LAYOUT APPROVAL .1 Prior to the start of work, layout and stake the limits of excavation and horizontal and vertical control points sufficient to install the soil cells and required drainage features in the correct locations.

3.2

UTILITY COORDINATION .1 Confirm that the layout of the soil cells is not in conflict with any existing or proposed utility lines or structures. In event that there is a conflict notify the City and take remedial actions to resolve the conflict as instructed by the City. Where needed, and approved by the City utility lines may be installed through the spaces within the soil cell frames. .1 .2

3.3

EXCAVATION .1 Excavate to the depths and shapes indicated on the drawings. Base of excavation shall be smooth soil, level and free of lumps or debris. .2

3.4

Excavate per manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s instructions.

SUB GRADE COMPACTION .1 Check compaction of the subgrade below the soil cells and confirm that the subgrade soil is compacted to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor Method. .1

.2 3.5

Secure and brace all utility lines placed within the frames.

Where lines require that the space between cells is larger than 75mm, use the manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s recommended spanning techniques to bridge paving over the gaps between frames.

Proof compact the subgrade with a minimum of three passes of a suitable vibrating compacting machine or apply other compaction forces as needed to achieve the required subgrade compaction rate.

Apply additional compaction forces at optimum water levels.

INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE OVER SUBGRADE .1 Where indicated on the drawings by the project engineer, install geotextile over the compacted subgrade material.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .2

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 8 OF 12

Install the geotextile with a minimum joint overlap of 450 mm between sections of material.

3.6

INSTALLATION OF SOLID AND PERFORATED DRAIN LINES .1 Lay out the location of all drain lines. Adjust the alignments to conform to the final locations of sleeves and risers. Do not locate drain lines within 150mm of the edge of any soil cell edge.

3.7

INSTALLATION OF AGGREGATE SUB BASE BELOW SOIL CELL FRAME .1 Install aggregate sub base to the depths indicated on the drawings, under the first layer of soil cell frames. .2

Compact aggregate sub base layer to a minimum of 95% of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D 698 Standard Proctor Method. .1

.3

3.8

Compact the subgrade with a minimum of three passes of a suitable vibrating compacting machine or apply other compaction forces as needed to achieve the required subgrade compaction rate.

Grade surface in a plane parallel to the grades of the paving above. .1

The tolerance for dips and bumps in the aggregate under soil cells shall be a 9 mm deviation from the plane in 3000mm and 3 mm in 1200 mm.

.2

The grade and elevations of the base under the soil cells shall be approved by the City prior to proceeding with the installation of the soil cells.

INSTALLATION OF SOIL CELLS, GROWING MEDIUM, GEOGRID, AND BACKFILL .1 Refer to manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s instructions. .2

Identify the outline layout of the structure and the edges of paving around tree planting areas on the floor of the excavation, using spray paint or chalk line. The layout shall be calculated to include shift in layout locations due to depth and the slope of the cells.

.3

Lay out the first layer of soil cell frames on the sub base. Verify that the layout is consistent with the required locations and dimensions of paving edges to be constructed over the soil cells. .1

Check each soil cell frame unit for damage prior to placing in the excavation. Any cracked or chipped unit shall be rejected.

.4

Place frames no less than 25 mm and no more than 75 mm apart.

.5

Assure that each soil cell sits solidly on the surface of the sub base. Soil cells shall not rock or bend over any stone or other obstruction protruding above the surface of the sub base material. Soil cells shall not bend into dips in the sub base material. The maximum tolerance for deviations in the plane of the sub base material under the bottom of the soil cells shall be 6 mm in 1200 mm. Adjust sub base material including larger pieces of aggregate under each soil cell to provide a solid base of support.

.6

For additional layers, comply with manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s requirements to correctly register and connect the soil cells together.

.7

Install Growing Medium, geogrid and geotextile curtain, rain water harvesting system and backfill as indicated on the drawings and per specification. The process of installation requires that these materials be installed and compacted together in several alternating operations to achieve correct compaction relationships within the system.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 9 OF 12

.8

Where required install utility lines within the soil cells during the installation of the system.

.9

Where required, place the geogrid and geotextile curtain along the outside of the limit of the soil cell frames. .1

.2 .3 .4 .5

Geogrid and geotextile curtains are required between the edge of the Soil Cells and any soils to be compacted to support paving beyond the area of Soil Cells.

Do not place geogrid and geotextile curtains between the edge of the Cells and any planting area adjacent to the Cells.

Pre-cut the geogrid and geotextile to allow for 150 mm minimum under lapping below backfill, and 300 mm minimum overlapping top of soil cells.

Where cell layout causes a change direction in the plane of the geogrid or geotextile, slice the top and bottom flaps of the material so that it lies flat on the top of the soil cells and aggregate base course along both planes.

Provide a minimum of 300mm overlaps between different sheets of geogrid or geotextile.

Place the geogrid and geotextile in the space between the soil cells and the sides of the excavation. Attach the geogrid to the soil cells at every soil cell then place the geotextile over the geogrid.

.10

Install no more than two layers of soil cell frames before beginning to install Growing Medium and backfill. Compact the Growing Medium within the soil cells and the backfill material outside the frames in alternating lifts until the desired elevations and density is achieved in both soils.

.11

Install and compact backfill material in the space between the soil cells and the sides of the excavation in lifts that do not exceed 250 mm in depth.

.12

.1

Compact backfill to minimum 95% of maximum dry density using a powered mechanical compactor. Use a pneumatic compacting tool or narrow foot jumping jack compactor for spaces less than 300 mm wide and a 300 mm wide jumping jack compactor or larger equipment in wider spaces.

.2

Maintain the geogrid and geotextile curtain between the soil cells and the backfill material.

.3

Install backfill in alternating lifts with the Growing Medium inside the soil cells.

Fill the first layer or layers of frames with Growing Medium, specified in Section "Growing Medium". Install in lifts that do not exceed 250 mm. Lightly compact the soil inside the frames at each lift to remove air pockets and settle the soil within the frames. Refer to manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s instructions. .1

.2 .3

Lightly compact each lift to achieve the following test results. Growing Medium compaction shall be tested at each lift using a cone penetrometer to between 2 70,000 and 140,000 kg/m (100 and 200 psi) when the soil is between 12% and 20% moisture.

If the Growing Medium becomes overly compacted, remove the soil and reinstall.

Use hand tools or other equipment that does not damage the soil cells.

Eliminate air pockets and voids. Fill each frame such that there is a minimum of 200 mm of soil over the top of the soil cells before beginning compaction.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

3.9

.13

After the first two layers of soil cells have been installed, filled with Growing Medium and backfilled, proceed to install the third layer of soil cells, if required. Comply with manufacturer’s requirements to correctly register and connect the soil cells together.

.14

Continue to install and compact the Growing Medium within the soil cells and the backfill material outside the frames in alternating lifts until the desired elevations and density is achieved in both soils. .1

When using mulch, add a final layer of Growing Medium as required to bring the Growing Medium level to not more than 25 mm below the bottom of the soil cell when installed.

.2

Obtain final approval by the City for the soil installation.

.15

Leave 25 mm air space, below top layer of soil cells.

.16

Install and compact remaining backfill material such that the soil outside the limits of the soil cells is flush with the top of the installed deck.

INSTALLATION OF RAIN WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITHIN THE SOIL CELLS .1 Install perforated rainwater distribution lines as specified in Section Rain Water Distribution System. .2

3.10

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 10 OF 12

Assure that lines are laid level within the growing medium at the depths indicated on the drawings.

INSTALLATION OF GEOTEXTILE, GEOGRID, INSPECTION RISER AND AGGREGATE OVER SOIL CELLS .1 Refer to manufacturer’s instructions. .2

Overlap geogrid over the top of the soil cells, with minimum of 300mm overlap.

.3

Place geotextile over the top of the soil cells and where indicated on the drawings, extending beyond the outside edge of the excavation by at least 450 mm. Any joints must be overlapped by a minimum of 450 mm.

.4

Cut geotextile larger than the size of the soil cell area to be covered to accommodate for required conforming of the geotextile and aggregate to the soil cell contours and all required overlaps.

.5

Install 100mm solid P.V.C. inspection risers above the soil cells where indicated on the plan or directed in the field. Install a minimum of one inspection riser for each four trees. .1

.2

Place inspection risers on top of the soil cells, assemble riser and fittings to dimensions required such that the rim of the riser cap is flush with the paving.

Set the rim top with a slope consistent with the slope of the pavement. .1

Adjust the location of the riser such that the center of the riser falls along the centerline of one of the soil cell slots. Cut the soil cell geotextile with an ‘X’ cut.

.2

Make a geotextile collar secured to the riser with zip ties that over lap the surrounding geotextile a minimum of 300mm. Secure in place with tape.

Brace all risers while backfill and paving is being installed to secure its location and elevation.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .6

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 11 OF 12

Install the aggregate base course over the geotextile immediately after completing the installation of the fabrics and inspection risers. Work the aggregate from one side of the soil cell to the other to ensure that the fabric and aggregate conforms to the soil cell contours. Do not apply aggregate in several positions at the same time. .1

Load the aggregate from equipment that is outside the limits of the excavated area. Use small, low impact material mover such as a concrete buggy or Georgia Buggy to move aggregate over the cells. Work over material already in place. Never allow any motorized equipment of any size to operate directly on top of the soil cells.

.2

For large or confined areas, where aggregate cannot easily be placed from the edges of the excavated area, obtain approval for the installation procedure and types of equipment to be used in the installation from the soil cell manufacturer.

.3

Compact aggregate base course(s) in lifts not to exceed 150mm in depth, to minimum 95% of maximum dry density. Utilize a roller or plate compactor with a maximum weight of 450 kg. Make sufficient passes with the compacting equipment to attain the required compaction.

3.11

INSTALLATION OF PAVING ABOVE THE SOIL CELL SYSTEM .1 Place planter curb and paving material over the soil cell system as specified in Sections Concrete and Unit Pavers. Take care when placing paving or other backfill on top of the soil cell system not to damage the system components.

3.12

INSTALLATION OF ROOT BARRIERS .1 Install root barrier in accord with manufacturer's reviewed installation instructions. .2

3.13

Install with vertical root directing ribs facing inwards towards trees or plants.

INSTALLATION OF GROWING MEDIUM WITHIN THE TREE PLANTING AREA .1 Prior to planting trees, install additional Growing Medium, to the depths indicated, within the tree opening adjacent to paving supported by soil cells. .2

Remove all rubble, debris, dust and silt from the top of the Growing Medium that may have accumulated after the initial installation of the Growing Medium within the soil cells.

.3

Assure that the Growing Medium under the tree root ball is compacted to approximately 85-90% to prevent settlement of the root ball.

.4

The Growing Medium within the tree opening shall be the same soil as in the adjacent soil cells.

3.14

REPAIR OF CUT GEOTEXTILE .1 In the event that any geotextile over subgrades or the soil cells must be cut during or after installation, repair the seam with a second piece of geotextile that overlaps the edges of the cut by a minimum of 300mm in all directions prior to adding aggregate material.

3.15

PROTECTION .1 Ensure that all construction traffic is kept away from the limits of the soil cells until the final surface materials are in place. No vehicles shall drive directly on the soil cells or aggregate base course.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

3.16

SECTION 32 88 88 SOIL CELLS PAGE 12 OF 12

.2

Provide fencing and other barriers to keep vehicles from entering into the area with soil cell supported pavement.

.3

Maintain a minimum of 100 mm of aggregate base course over the geotextile material during construction.

.4

When vehicles must cross soil cells that do not have final paving surfaces installed, use construction mats and thicker aggregate layers designed to distribute vehicle loads to levels that would be expected at the soil cell surface once final paving has been installed.

Use only low impact track vehicles with a maximum surface pressure under the vehicle of 2 20 kg/m , on top of the mats over soil cells prior to the installation of final paving.

CLEAN UP .1 Perform cleanup during the installation of work and upon completion of the work.

Maintain the site free of soil and sediment, free of trash and debris. Remove from site all excess soil materials, debris, and equipment. Repair any damage to adjacent materials and surfaces resulting from installation of this work.

END OF SECTION 32 88 88

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 1 OF 17

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

1.2

1.3

SUMMARY .1

The work in this section includes, but is not limited to, the following: .1 Mixing and testing of Topsoil, Coarse Sand or aggregate and Pine Bark or other organic material to create Growing Medium and Structural Soil. .2 Installation of Growing Medium and Structural Soil. .3 Compacting and grading of Growing Medium and Structural Soil. .4 Adding organic material to the surface layer of Growing Medium.

.2

References: .1 The following references and standards are use herein and shall mean: .1 ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials. .2 Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment .1 PN1340-[2005], Guidelines for Compost Quality. .3 US Department of Agriculture (USDA) Soil Classification System

RELATED SECTIONS .1

Section 32 88 88 Soil Cells

.2

Section 32 93 00 Planting

.3

Section 32 84 10 Rainwater Distribution System

SUBMITTALS .1

Certificates: Submit certification for approval that all Growing Medium components and the Growing Medium meet all environmental standards of Ontario and the City of Toronto.

Certificate shall state that all materials are within the required maximum levels of all biological and metal and chemical contaminants.

.2

Product Data: Submit manufacturer product data and literature for approval for Coarse Sand, Pine Bark Compost and Yard Waste Compost. Provide submittal as part of the submittal of components for the Growing Medium prior to the submission of the Growing Medium. .1 Submit the manufacturer’s particle size analysis, pH and the manufacturer’s Fines Modulus Index for Coarse Sand. Provide Manufactures identification and location for each Coarse Sand source. .2

.3

Submit the manufacturer’s Pine Bark Compost and Yard Waste Compost analysis for approval. Chemical and physical testing shall be conducted by soil laboratories accredited by The Compost Quality Alliance (CQA) utilizing test methods specified in The Test Methods for Examination of Composting and Compost (TMECC) except as specified herein.

The analysis shall include: Parameter pH Soluble Salt - mmhos/cm % Moisture % Dry weight Organic Matter Carbon: Nitrogen (C:N) Ratio

Testing Method TMECC 4.11A TMECC 4.10-A TMECC 5.07-A

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

.3 .4

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 2 OF 17

Particle size % passing 50mm screen and 10mm screen TMECC 2.02-B Solvita Maturity Index Solvita Physical contaminants (man made inerts) % dry weight TMECC 3.08-A Submit testing for chemical and biological contaminants and pathogens as required by local government regulations.

Certified reports shall be from samples taken within four months of the date of the sample submission.

.3

Material source locations: Submit locations of Topsoil and Growing Medium material sources. The City shall have the right to reject any material source. Submit the name, address and telephone number of the source contact, and the location of the soil source including directions to the specific field location on the property. Provide submittal eight weeks before the installation of Growing Medium.

.4

Samples: Submit samples of each product and material where required by the specification to the City for approval. Label samples to indicate product, specification number, characteristics, and locations in the Work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor. Delivered materials shall closely match the samples. Submit samples of all soil mix components a minimum of eight weeks before the installation of Growing Medium. .1 Submit duplicate 4-liter samples (total 8 liters) of all Topsoil, Coarse Sand, Pine Bark Compost, Yard Waste Compost and Growing Medium in this section. .1 Samples should be labeled to include the location of the source of the material. .2 Samples of each material shall be submitted at the same time as the product data and testing data of that material. Samples and analysis of Topsoil, and Growing Medium must be submitted within 28 calendar days of sampling. .3 Each test report shall be marked with the following information:

.5

.1 .2 .3

Date issued.

.4 .5 .6

Date, place, and time of sampling.

.7 .8

Type(s) of test

Project Title and names of Contractor and material supplier.

Name of material and reference number from Part 2 of the specifications identifying the type of material.

Location of material source.

Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and name(s), as applicable, of each field and laboratory inspector.

Results of tests including recommendations of acceptable ranges of the test data for the types of plants to be planted in the soil and recommendations for soil amendments to bring the soil to within these acceptable ranges. .4 Samples of all Growing Medium components shall be submitted eight weeks before the installation of Growing Medium. Growing Medium shall be submitted no less than two weeks after the approval of the mix component. .5 Do not submit Growing Medium for approval until all mix components have been approved by the City.

Testing Reports: Submit soil test analysis report for approval for each sample of Topsoil and Growing Medium from an approved soil-testing laboratory to include the following:

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1

.2 .3

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 3 OF 17

The testing laboratory shall be approved by the City in advance. All soil and Growing Medium tests shall be conducted by soil laboratories accredited by The Ontario Ministry of Agriculture, Food and Rural Affairs (OMAFRA), except as noted below. Current listing of accredited laboratories may be obtained on the web at http://www.omafra.gov.on.ca/english/crops/resource/soillabs.htm. Submit the name of the soil lab for approval prior to starting the testing process.

All tests shall be performed in accordance with the current testing standards and protocols of The Ontario Ministry of Agriculture, Food and Rural Affairs (OMAFRA) except where otherwise noted.

Particle size analysis for all Topsoil and Growing Medium including the following sand fraction gradient of mineral content: USDA Designation Gravel Very Coarse Sand Coarse Sand Medium Sand Fine Sand Very Fine Sand Silt Clay

Size in mm. >2mm 1-2 mm 0.5 -1 mm 0.25-0.5 mm 0.1-0.25 mm 0.05-0.1 mm 0.002-0.05 mm <0.002 mm

.1

.4

.5

Particle size analysis for Topsoil and Growing Medium to include sand sieve analysis shall be performed per ASTM D422 (hydrometer test) or ASTMF1632 (pipette test).

Chemical analysis including the following: .1 pH .2 Nutrient levels by parts per million including: Phosphorus Potassium Magnesium Calcium .1 Nutrient test shall include the testing laboratory recommendations for supplemental additions to the Growing Medium. .3 Soluble salt by electrical conductivity of a 1:2 soil water sample measured in mmhos/cm. .4 Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC). .5 Percent of Organic Matter by dry weight as determined by ignition (Ash Burn Test or Walkley/Black Test, ASTM F1647). .6 Report suitability of Topsoil or Growing Medium for growth of applicable planting material. Soil analysis tests shall include recommendations for normal acceptable ranges of soil chemical attributes for the type of plants included in the project in the same units as the test data.

The City may request additional Growing Medium test on different mix component ratios in order to attain results that more closely meet the mix requirements.

.6

In-Situ Compaction testing: Submit results of all compaction testing required by the specifications including the compaction testing log of penetrometer and moisture meter readings to the City for approval.

.7

Laboratoryâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s comments or recommendations regarding amendment requirements or procedures shall not be interpreted to prescribe or dictate procedures or quantities of soil

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 4 OF 17

materials for the work of this Contract. Final approval of soil amendment procedures shall be approved by the City.

1.4

.8

The City reserves the right to require additional soil analysis at any time such additional samples of materials are deemed necessary for verification of conformance to specification requirements. Contractor shall furnish samples for this purpose upon request and shall perform testing as requested.

.9

All testing will be at the expense of the Contractor.

.10

Contractors Qualifications: Submit documentation that the installing contractor meets all the requirements of quality assurance in section 1.6.2 below

.11

Submittal checklist: At the end of this specification section, a submittal check list is provided for the contractors use. This list is a summary of the requirements and is not intended to supplant or modify the above descriptions of the requirements. Where this summary may suggest a different specific instruction, the above specification shall take precedent.

GROWING MEDIUM IN-SITU COMPACTION TESTING. .1

1.5

1.6

Installed Growing medium shall be tested in-situ with a cone penetrometer and a soil moisture meter. Penetration resistance shall be to the full depth of the installed soil profile or 750 mm which ever is less. One test shall be performed every 25 square Meters of Growing Medium surface area. The city may request additional testing locations. .1 The cone penetrometer shall be â&#x20AC;&#x153;Soil Compaction Testerâ&#x20AC;? as manufactured by Dickey-John, and distributed by Ben Meadows www.benmeadows.com .2 Maintain a record log of all compaction testing for submission and approval. The record log shall include the date, location, depth and pressure reading of each test. Test location data shall be plotted on a site plan

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING .1

General: Prior to the start of Work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades.

.2

Schedule the installation of Growing Medium after the area is no longer required for use by other trades and work or protect the Growing Medium from compaction and contamination.

.3

Schedule all utility installations prior to beginning work in this section.

QUALITY ASSURANCE .1

Contractor is solely responsible for quality control of the Work.

.2

The installer shall be a firm having at least 5 years of successful experience of a scope similar to that required for the Work, including the preparation, mixing and installation of custom Growing Medium in urban locations.

.3

Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of federal, State and municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary permits and approvals from all such authorities.

.4

Comply with all requirements for control of silt and sediment during soil installation work as indicated in the contract documents. Use any other methods and procedures requested by the City to control silt and sediment as project conditions warrant.

.5

Review of work by the City: The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the plans and specifications regardless of review or lack of review by the City.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1 .2

1.7

Failure of the City to reject unsatisfactory workmanship or to notify the Contractor of their responsibility to repair and/or replace unsatisfactory work shall not constitute acceptance of the work.

The City reserves the right to take and analyze, at any time, such additional samples of materials as deemed necessary for verification of conformance to specification requirements. Contactor shall furnish samples for this purpose upon request and shall perform any additional testing requested.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .1

1.8

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 5 OF 17

Weather: Do not mix, deliver or place soils in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. .1

Where construction sequencing requires work during cold weather, protect sub grades and bulk materials from freezing using covers or as needed heated tenting. Sub grades that are sufficiently well drained to preclude the buildup of ice may be installed and built upon during freezing weather provided the surface is cleared of snow and any ice bound material.

.2

Harvest Topsoil and prepare Growing Medium ahead of the scheduled work during periods of warm weather. Protect stockpiles of soil and Growing Medium from freezing and saturation. Remove soil from within the interior of the stockpile where soil and Growing Medium are not frozen. At the end of each day cover the exposed working face of the stockpile sufficient to keep the pile from freezing.

.2

Protect soil stockpiles from rain and washing that can separate fines and coarse material.

Cover stockpiles with plastic sheeting at the end of each workday.

.3

Protect Growing Medium stockpiles from contamination by chemicals, dust and debris that may be detrimental to plants or soil drainage.

.4

Do not use delivery or installation methods that overly mix pulverize the Growing Medium.

Soil blowing equipment and â&#x20AC;&#x153;soil slingerâ&#x20AC;? equipment shall not be permitted to move Growing Medium

SITE CONDITIONS .1

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be aware of all surface and sub-surface conditions, and to report any circumstances that will negatively impact soil drainage. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with work constitutes acceptance of existing or corrected conditions.

.2

Utilities: Determine location of all utilities including vaults, conduits, pipes and wires adjacent to, below or within the areas of work. Perform all work in a manner, which will avoid damage to any utility. Hand excavate near any utility.

.3

Waterproofing: Perform work in a manner, which will avoid damage to waterproofing membrane, protection board or other structural sealing materials.

.4

Construction Sequencing: .1 Install all soils at the point in the project sequencing that the soil can be adequately protected from other work at the site.

.5

Coordination: Coordinate work with that of other trades affecting or affected by work of this Section and cooperate to assure the steady progress of work.

.6

Safety: The Contactor shall be responsible for pedestrian and vehicular safety and control all movement within and around the work site. Provide the necessary barriers, warning

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 6 OF 17

devices and ground personnel needed to give safety, warning and protection to persons and vehicular traffic within the area of work including the contractor's equipment and temporary storage within the public right of way. Provide any additional items required by the City. .7

Damage: During site preparation, soil installation and protection, the Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to existing features above and below ground incurred as a result of work operations. Repairs and/or replacements shall be made to the satisfaction of the City.

.8

Protect all installed material for compaction, contamination and erosion. Install fences; utilize mulch, mats and geofabrics over the surface of the soil as required. In the event that any soil becomes compacted, contaminated or eroded, repair the damage using procedures required by the City.

Part 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

TOPSOIL .1

Topsoil shall be fertile, loam, sandy loam to sandy clay loam, suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth, which is a naturally produced soil harvested from the O or A horizon of the soil profile and meeting the following requirements. It is the intent of this specification to use naturally occurring soils available within the Toronto region. Topsoil shall meet the following criteria. .1 Chemical Analysis: .1 pH less than 7.8 and greater than 5.5 .2 Nutrient levels: Phosphorous ppm 10-60 Potassium ppm 80-250 Calcium ppm <5000 Magnesium ppm 100-300

.2 .3

.4

.3 Soluble Salt less than 0.50 mmhos/cm .4 Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) greater than 20.0 meq/100gr. .5 Percent Organic Matter between 2.5 and 5%.

Topsoil shall have clay content between 15 and 23%; combined silt and clay content between 35 and 60% and gravel/ stone content of no more than 5%.

Topsoil shall retain a significant portion of the soils ped structure when stockpiled at the suppliers yard. At least 25% of the soil volume shall be soil peds larger than 25mm in diameter. Peds are defined as the clumps of soil naturally aggregated during the soil building process, by clays and soil biology. Peds of any size are permissible. .1 Peds are to determined by visual approximation for both size and quantity. The City shall determine when soils have sufficient ped Topsoil shall not contain materials and contaminants at levels that would be harmful to plant growth; or impair drainage, installation or maintenance of the resulting Growing Medium; or adversely impact its intended use including the following: .1 Refuse; roots; construction debris; wood or sticks larger than 25mm (1 inch) in diameter; brush; clumps of root mats of plants and/or toxic materials .2 Lumps of clay or subsoil larger than 50mm (2â&#x20AC;?); stones larger than 75 mm (3â&#x20AC;?)

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 7 OF 17

.3

.5

2.2

Deleterious substances; plant or soil pests; undesirable grasses including crabgrass or couch grass, noxious or weeds or weed seeds; .4 The City shall determine if the quantities of any of these materials is sufficient to cause rejection of the Topsoil. The aggregate of all the above materials shall not exceed 5% of the total soil volume as assesed by visual inspection.

Topsoil shall be in conformance with City of Toronto Weed Control Act. The contractor shall be responsible for removing all weeds that germinate during the plant maintenance period.

.2

Topsoil shall be harvested from approved source locations that comply with all regulations governing the removal of topsoil.

.3

Topsoil may be purchased from a source of collected topsoil from development sites provided the sources of the soil stock pile is of similar textures and meets the requirements of this specification.

.4

Topsoil shall not be a soil mix including a combination of sand, fertilizer, or organic matter or compost added to mineral soil in order to meet the texture, chemical or organic requirements for Topsoil. The organic matter content of the soil shall be residue of long term, natural soil building processes and not from added organic matter or compost.

.5

Topsoil shall not be screened through sieves or screens smaller than 50mm to avoid eliminating the required soil peds.

.6

Submit source location and a list of all crops grown on the soil and any herbicides and pesticides applied over the previous three years.

.7

Submit two 4-liter samples from each Topsoil source with soil testing results. The sample shall be a mixture of the random samples taken around the source field or stockpile. The delivered sample shall represent the soil ped content in the stockpile

COARSE SAND .1

Coarse Concrete Sand, ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate, with a Fines Modulus Index between 2.8 and 3.2.

.2

Physical Analysis: Sieve Size mm 9.5 4.75 2.36 1.18 0.60 0.30 0.15 0.075

% Passing 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 25-85 5030 0-10 <3

The results must be submitted for Fines Modulus Index, percent (%) passing for all sieve sizes. Failure to include any of the aforementioned criteria will be cause for rejection of the test report. .3

Coarse Sand shall be clean, sharp, mineral sand.

.4

Coarse Sand shall be washed to remove silt and clay particles.

.5

Chemical analysis shall be as follows: Organic matter content (% oven dry weight of soil) less than 0.5%. pH shall be less than 8.6 Soluble salt content (Conductivity) Less than 0.5 mmhos/cm for 1:2 sample to water ratio.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 8 OF 17

Coarse Sand shall not contain toxic substance content at levels harmful to plant growth. .6 2.3

Submit two four liter samples with manufacturers literature and material testing certification that the product meets the requirements.

YARD WASTE COMPOST and PINE BARK COMPOST

.1

Compost shall be a stable, humus-like material produced from the aerobic decomposition, composted and cured until the maturity status complies with indices specified below.

Except as specified herein, Compost shall conform to the requirements for Category A Compost as defined in the Guidelines for Compost Quality (2005), Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment.

.2

Yard Waste Compost feedstock shall be yard waste trimmings and/or source-separated municipal solid waste.

.3

Pine Bark Compost feedstock shall be 98% pine trees with less than 10% combined pine wood fiber and sawdust content.

.4

Compost shall not contain debris such as sharp objects, plastics, trace elements and foreign matter in excess of that defined for Category A Compost. Total of all stones, recognizable branches, wood chips and roots larger than 25mm in diameter shall be less than 5% by volume.

.5

Compost shall have a moisture content between 35 and 55% when blended or applied.

.6

Yard Waste Compost and Pine Bark Compost shall be composted long enough to exhibit a dark brown color, approximately Munsell colour 7.5 R; Value 3 or lower; Chroma 2 or lower. Color shall be determined by visual comparison of the sample to the â&#x20AC;&#x153;Munsell Soil Color Chartâ&#x20AC;?, most current edition.

.7

Compost shall have a strong aerobic (sweet) odor. Compost lacking a strong aerobic odor or which has an anaerobic (sour) or a strong pine or alcohol odor shall be rejected. Odor may be determined during the submittal sample review and at the time of any inspections of materials by the City by observation of the inspector.

.8

Certification: provide the following documentation: .1 A statement that the Compost meets all health and safety regulations. .2 Feedstock type and percentage in the final Compost product.

.9

Testing: Compost shall have one (1) composite sample tested from each 100 cubic meters of material intended for use in Growing Medium. The results of Compost analysis shall be provided by the Compost supplier for approval. Compost shall meet the following criteria as reported by the following laboratory tests: Parameter Range pH Yard Waste Compost 5.0 - 7.8 pH Pine Bark Compost 4.0 - 5.0 Soluble Salt < 3.5 mmhos/cm % Moisture 35-55% wet weight basis % Organic matter >35% dry weight basis Carbon to nitrogen ratio Yard Waste Compost 15:1 - 25:1 Particle Size Yard Waste Compost 95% pass through 50mm screen 25% pass through 10mm screen Particle Size Pine Bark Compost 95% pass through 20mm screen 25% pass through 6mm screen Solvita Maturity Index 6 to 8 Physical contaminants <1% dry weight basis (man-made inerts)

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .1

.2 .10 2.4

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 9 OF 17

Metal content shall comply with Interim Guidelines for the Production and Use of Aerobic Compost in Ontario (2004) except for copper and zinc, which must comply with Soil, Ground Water and Sediment Standards for Use Under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection Act Table 3 (medium to fine textured soils).

Pathogen reduction shall meet Section 6.0 of Interim Guidelines for the Production and Use of Aerobic Compost in Ontario (2004).

Submit two four liter samples with manufacturer’s literature and material testing certification that the product meets the requirements.

GROWING MEDIUM– (for use in open planting spaces, soil trenches and Soil Cell installations below paving)

.1

A mixture of Topsoil, Coarse Sand and Pine Bark Compost mixed to the following proportions, by volume: .1 .2 .3

.2

40-45% 40-50% 12-15%

The Growing Medium shall meet the following parameters as measured by dry weight .1 Particle distribution:

.2 .3

.4

.5 .3

Topsoil Coarse Sand Pine Bark Compost

.1 Total sand/gravel sized 0.25mm – 5mm: Minimum 45% .2 Total combined silt and clay: Between 18 and 35% Organic matter: Between 3.0 and 5.0%. pH: between 6.0 and 7.8.

Note to specifiers: The ph maximum of 7.8 will be acceptable for most trees and other plants in the Toronto area. However, if the design team specifies pH sensitive trees or plants, the pH maximum should be lowered to an appropriate level for those plants. Note that lower pH growing medium will cost more due to the lack of availability of lower pH components. Coordinate the specification with the design team on species requirements.

Chemical analysis; Acceptable ranges in PPM .1 Phosphorous ppm 10-60 .2 Potassium ppm 80-250 .3 Calcium ppm <5000 .4 Magnesium ppm 100-300 Soluble salts mmhos/cm <1.5

Mix the Growing Medium with a loader bucket to preserve Topsoil peds using the following method: .1 Mix the Coarse Sand and Compost together separately. .2 Spread a layer of Topsoil approximately 300 mm thick and apply the required proportions of Coarse Sand/Compost mix over the Topsoil. .3 Push the Topsoil, Coarse Sand and Compost into a pile and then drag out into a layer mixing the soil with the bucket. Repeat the mixing action a second time to gain an approximate mixture of the material. Do not over mix. .4 This method assumes that there is an additional mixing of the materials as it is moved to the final stockpile, placed into the delivery trucks, deposited at the project site, and spread into the planting space. .5 This method assumes that soil will not be installed using soil blower or soli slinging equipment.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .4 2.5

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 10 OF 17

Submit two four liter samples with material testing certification that the product meets the requirements.

EXISTING SITE SOIL USED AS GROWING MEDIUM Note to specifiers: There are likely many places in the neighborhood commercial districts of Toronto, where the soil under the existing pavement can be reused and installed in to the soil zones being constructed. These would be places where the underlying soil is disturbed and compacted native soils that have not been mixed with gravels or unshrinkable fills, locations where the remaining native soils are not deep subsoils with high clay or silt content, soils with very high or low pH or where the native soil has been contaminated with chemicals and or salt. In most cases the existing soil only requires loosening the compaction and adding Yard Waste Compost. Making the determination if this is feasible requires the examination of the soil conditions by a soil expert.

However, often, reasonable investigation of the soil is not possible until large areas of paving have been removed. This delay may make the decision for reuse difficult. Other considerations are project schedule and space to temporarily store soil at the site and to undertake the compost mixing operations. In tight urban sites these constraints may make reuse of soil overly expensive.

The design team must evaluate all the factors in soil reuse before proceeding to assume that this concept is feasible. This decision should not be left to the contractor to decide, although it might be left in the specification as an option provided it does not have a negative impact on the project cost. .1

Existing site soil may be used as Growing Medium at sites where the existing soil has been analyzed by an agricultural soil scientist and determined to be suitable for tree planting. The Urban Forestry Branch shall approve the use of existing soils and may add additional requirements to amend the soil where required.

.2

The following are requirements for Existing Site Soil to be used as Growing Medium. .1 Texture â&#x20AC;&#x201C; USDA loam to sandy loam with combined silt and clay content between 20 and 40% and gravel not to exceed 8%. .2 pH: between 6.0 and 7.8. .3 Final chemical analysis adjusted to meet the requirements for Growing Medium. .4 Soluble salts mmhos/cm <2.0 .5 Soil testing to determine the above described soil conditions shall be at sufficient intravals to accurately depict the soil quality but no less than one test per 20 cubic meters of soil.

.3

Existing Site Soil to be reused shall be excavated to break up compaction and reinstalled at the compaction required for Growing Medium. .1

.4

Excavation, moving, stockpiling and installation of Existing Site soil shall utilize means and methods that preserve soil peds. Large compacted soil peds up to 200mm in any dimension are acceptable.

Yard Waste Compost shall be loosely incorporated to the soil at the time of installation at a rate of 20% by volume. .1

Push the Existing Site Soil into stockpiles no greater than 1.5M tall. Cover the stockpile with Yard Waste Compost of sufficient volume to roughly equal 20% of the stockpile volume. Using the bucket of a back how, drag the pile to approximately 1/3rd its height. Working from the bottom, turn the pile over one.

Install into the soil area following the requirements for Growing Medium.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .2 .3 .5

2.6

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 11 OF 17

Fertilizer shall be added to the soil, if required to meet the chemical requirements of Growing Medium.

Soil shall not be contaminated with toxic chemicals harmful to humans or plants at levels regulated by provincial or federal laws.

Submit the agricultural soil scientist report for approval. The report shall describe the extent and depth of the soil to be reused, and the soils quality relative to the required parameters. It is understood that obtaining accurate soil information in urban areas is difficult if there is paving over the soil. A preliminary soil report shall be submitted a minimum of 8 weeks prior to the installation of the soil. Once the soil has been made accessible by the construction, the soil shall be reevaluated and a final report submitted.

The Urban Forestry Branch may alter the approval or make additional requirements based on the final soils report.

STRUCTURAL SOIL Note to specifiers: Structural soil is intended for use to solve specific structural problems where extending rooting space is desired but the dimensional limitations proposed structural systems such as precast panels or Soil Cells may not be flexible enough to accommodate the dimensional requirements of the space. These may include areas beside and over utility lines, or adjacent to light post or other sub grade structures. In these cases structural soil can be specified to fill odd shaped or narrow spaces where it is desirable to have roots extend into these places or to pass through the structural soil into soil usable for rooting space beyond. Structural soil is not intended to be specified as the primary soil volume for trees nor is it to be used within any planting space not covered with paving. .1

A uniformly blended mixture of crushed stone, clay loam soil and hydrogel, mixed to the following proportion: MATERIAL UNIT OF WEIGHT Crushed Stone 100 dry weight USDA Clay Loam Soil

As determined by the test of the mix (Approx. 18 +/- dry weight)

Hydrogel

0.03 dry weight

Total moisture

10% (AASHTO T -99 optimum moisture)

.2

The mix design shall be determined by adjusting the ratio between the Crushed Stone and the Clay loam such that the percent of Clay Loam in the mix is less than 85% and more than 75% of the percent of voids in the Crushed Stone.

.3

The above formula is a patented mixture developed by Cornell University called CU Soil.

The Patent is administered by Amereq, Inc; 19 Squadron Blvd, New York City, NY, 10956; 800 832 8788.

.4

Crushed stone, clay loam soil and hydrogel shall meet the specifications of the patent and the requirements of Amereq, Inc. The crushed stone shall be from a non limestone source.

.5

Structural Soil shall be supplied by a distributor licensed by Amereq, Inc with a minimum of five years experience mixing and supplying CU Soil.

.6

Structural Soil shall be delivered at or near optimum compaction moisture content as determined by AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698). Do not deliver or place materials in an excessively moist condition (beyond 2 percent above optimum compaction moisture content as determined by AASHTO T 99 (ASTM D 698).

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .7 2.7

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 12 OF 17

Provide a two 4 liter sample with manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s literature, analysis data, and material certification that the product meets the requirements.

CHEMICAL ADDITIVES .1

Chemicals and other materials designed to increase soil fertility. All products shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers and stored in a dry enclosed space suitable for the material and meeting all environmental regulations. All products shall be freshly manufactured and dated for the season in which the products are to be used. .1 Fertilizer for planting shall be organic fertilizer, as defined under the Canadian Fertilizer Act. .2 Fertilizer selections shall be based on the recommendations of the soil test.

Submit manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s product literature.

Part 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

3.2

SITE EXAMINATION .1

Examine the surface grades and soil conditions for any circumstances that might be detrimental to soil drainage, such as uneven sub grades and waterproofing that may hold or pond water, deposits of construction-related waste or soil contamination, storage of material or equipment, soil compaction or poor drainage. Confirm that all utility work and installation of planter drainage has been completed and tested. Examine the grading, verify all elevations. C

.2

onfirm that all other work in the area of Growing Medium installation is completed. Notify the City in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.

COORDINATION WITH PROJECT WORK .1

3.3

3.4

The Contractor shall coordinate with all other work that may impact the completion of the work. Protect installed Growing Medium from compaction by other trades.

GRADE AND ELEVATION CONTROL .1

Provide grade and elevation control during installation of Growing Medium. Utilize grade stakes, surveying equipments and other means and methods to assure that grades and contours conform to the grades indicated on the plans.

.2

Maintain grade stakes until the grades have been viewed by the City.

SITE PREPARATION .1

In areas not above structure, excavate to the proposed sub grade. Maintain all required angles of repose of the adjacent materials as shown on the drawings or as required to support adjacent materials or structures. Do not over excavate compacted sub grades of adjacent pavement or structures. Remove all construction debris and material.

.2

Confirm that the sub grade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Sub grade elevations shall slope parallel to the finished grade and/or toward the subsurface drain lines as shown on the drawings.

.3

Do not proceed with the installation of Growing Medium, until all utility work in the area has been installed.

.4

Do not begin Growing Medium installation until all subsurface drainage, and irrigation main lines shown on the drawings are viewed and approved by the City.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .5

3.5

3.6

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 13 OF 17

Protect adjacent walls, walks and utilities from damage or staining by the soil. Use 12mm plywood and or plastic sheeting as directed to cover existing concrete, metal and masonry work and other items as directed during the progress of the work. .1 Clean up any soil or dirt spilled on any paved surface, including at the end of each working day. .2 Any damage to the paving or architectural work shall be repaired by the contractor at the contractor’s expense.

GROWING MEDIUM INSTALLATION (SOIL CELLS) .1

Install and compact Growing Medium within Soil Cells in accordance with Specification Section Soil Cells.

.2

Coordinate the installation of the water harvesting system and drain lines within the Soil Cells.

GROWING MEDIUM INSTALLATION (All Growing Medium except within Soil Cells) .1

Prior to installing any Growing Medium, the City shall approve the condition of the sub grade and the previously installed sub grade preparation and the installation of subsurface drainage material.

.2

In areas of soil installation above existing subsoil, till the Growing Medium into the bottom layer of subsoil. .1 Loosen or till the subsoil of the sub grade to a depth of 50-75 mm with a backhoe or other suitable device. The use of soil blowing equipment or “soil slinging” equipment is not permitted to install Growing Medium. .2 Spread a layer of the specified Growing Medium 50-75mm deep over the sub grade. Thoroughly till the Growing Medium and the sub grade together. .3 Immediately install the remaining Growing Medium in accordance with the following specifications. Protect the tilled area from traffic. DO NOT allow the tilled sub grade to become compacted. .4 In the event that the tilled area becomes overly compacted, re-till the area again prior to installing the Growing Medium.

.3

Install the remaining Growing Medium in 300-400mm lifts to the required depths. Work out from the installed soil such that equipment does not have to pass over the installed soils.

.4

The depths and grades shown on the drawings are the final grades after settlement and shrinkage of the organic material. The contractor shall install the Growing Medium at a higher level to anticipate this reduction of Growing Medium volume depending upon predicted settling properties for each type of Growing Medium as indicated on the drawing.

.5

Utilize grading and earth moving equipment that uses low impact tracks that is rated to 2 exert a static force on the ground of no more than 20 kg/M . All equipment used to install soil shall have buckets equipped with teeth to loosen soil compaction.

.6

When any equipment passes over previously prepared subgrade or installed soil it shall reverse out of the soil area over the same path dragging the teeth of the bucket over the tracks to break surface compaction created by the equipment.

.7

Coordinate the installation of water harvesting system and drain lines within the Growing Medium.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES 3.7

3.8

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 14 OF 17

GROWING MEDIUM COMPACTION (All Growing Medium except within Soil Cells) .1

Lightly compact each 300-400mm lift to achieve the following test results. .1 Growing Medium compaction shall be tested at each lift using a cone penetrometer to between 70,000 and 140,000 Kg/M2 (100 and 200 psi) when the soil is between 12 and 20% moisture.

.2

Compact Growing Medium under the root balls of all trees to between 200,000 and 250,000 Kg/M2 (275 and 350 psi) when the soil is between 12 and 20% moisture to reduce settlement and provide a stable base for the tree as indicated on the drawings.

.3

Maintain moisture conditions within the Growing Medium during installation to allow for satisfactory compaction. Suspend installation operations if the Growing Medium becomes wet. Do not place Growing Medium on wet or frozen sub grade.

.4

Provide adequate equipment to achieve consistent and uniform compaction of the Growing Medium. Use the smallest equipment that can reasonably perform the task of spreading and compaction.

.5

Using the penetrometer and the moisture meter, test the compaction levels in the installed growing medium. .1 Testing shall be performed by the contractor. .2 Record the test results on a soil compaction testing log. This report shall include the location of the test, the depth of the test measures from the proposed finished grade, the penetrometer reading, the moisture meter reading, The penetrometer reading and the moisture meter reading. .3 Submit the compaction log to the City at the end of soil installation period. The soil compaction log shall be kept current and available at the site for review at all times.

.6

At the end of the installation of the soil and prior to the installation of Organic Matter and plants, take a minimum of four undisturbed soil samples from locations selected by the City to determine bulk density. Submit test results for approval.

INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL SOIL .1

Confirm that the sub grade material is graded towards the drain line locations and fully compacted to 95% of maximum dry density.

.2

Install Structural Soil in 150-200mm lifts and compact each lift. .1 Compact Structural Soil to not less than 95% of peak dry density from a standard AASHTO compaction curve (AASHTO T 99). No compaction shall occur when moisture content exceeds maximum moisture content for optimum compaction as stated in the proctor test. Delay compaction 24 hours if moisture content exceeds maximum allowable and protect Structural Soil during delays in compaction with plastic or plywood as directed by the City. .2 Test the density of Structural Soil with suitable testing equipment undertaken by a qualified geotechnical soil testing lab.

.3

Bring Soil Structural Soil to finished grades as shown on the Drawings.

.4

Fine grading: Adjust the finish grades to meet field conditions as directed. .1 Provide smooth transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction. .2 Fill all dips and remove any bumps in the overall plane of the slope. .3 The tolerance for dips and bumps in Structural Soil areas shall be a 50mm deviation from the plane in 2000mm.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .5

3.9

3.10

3.11

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 15 OF 17

Immediately after installation of each section of Structural Soil, cover the area with 4 mil plastic sheeting sufficient to keep the material from being contaminated or washed during rain events. Maintain all protection until the installation of the paving above. Remove all plastic sheeting prior to installing the paving above the Structural Soil.

PROTECTION .1

Protect Growing Medium from compaction and contamination by dust, debris, and any toxic material harmful to plants or humans after placement. Any area, which becomes compacted, shall be tilled to a depth of 150mm. Any uneven or settled areas shall be filled and re graded.

.2

Phase the installation of the Growing Medium such that equipment does not have to travel over already installed Growing Medium.

GROWING MEDIUM FINE GRADING .1

The City shall view all rough grading prior to the installation of Organic Matter, fine grading, planting, and mulching.

.2

Set grades at time of installation high enough relative to the type of Growing Medium and settlement anticipated so that the Growing Medium will be at the correct grades after the 12 month settlement period. .1 This specification assumes that initial soil settlement during the first 12 months after installation will be between 10 and 15% of the installed soil depth. Assure that the soil is mounded sufficiently high enough to accommodate this settlement. .2 At the end of the planting warrantee period, if grades have settled greater than 5% of the soil depth below the grades shown on the drawings, reset the grades to the final grades shown on the grading plan.

.3

Adjust the finish grades to meet field conditions as directed.

.4

Provide for positive drainage from all areas toward the existing inlets, drainage structures and or the edges of planting beds. Adjust grades as directed to reflect actual constructed field conditions of paving, wall and inlet elevations. Notify the City in the event that conditions make it impossible to achieve positive drainage.

.5

Provide smooth transitions between slopes of different gradients and direction. Modify the grade so that the finish grade is flush with all paving surfaces or as directed by the drawings.

.6

Fill all dips and remove any bumps in the over all plane of the slope. .1 The tolerance for dips and bumps in shrub and ground cover planting areas shall be a 25mm deviation from the plane in 2000mm.

.7

Restore all grades after the installation of plants. Remove any excess soil removed during the planting process.

INSTALLATION OF YARD WASTE COMPOST (In areas of growing medium greater than 4 sq M in area, not covered by paving) .1

In all areas of Growing Medium in open planting beds, after the specified Growing Medium is installed, and just prior to the installation of tree, shrub or groundcover plantings, spread 100mm of Yard Waste Compost and roto-till into the top 150mm of the Growing Medium. Restore grades after tilling.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES 3.12

3.13

3.14

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 16 OF 17

CLEAN-UP .1

During installation, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

.2

Keep the site clear of trash and debris at all times. Immediately dispose of wrappings or waste materials associated with products necessary for the completion of the work.

.3

All trash and debris shall be kept in a central collection container. Do not bury trash and debris in back-fill.

.4

Once installation is complete, remove any excess soil from pavements or embedded fixtures.

PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION .1

The Contractor shall protect work and materials from damage including: compaction, contamination, and erosion due to operations by other Contractors or trespassers.

Maintain protection during installation until acceptance. Treat, repair or replace damaged Growing Medium installation work immediately.

.2

Till compacted Growing Medium and replace Growing Medium that has become contaminated as determined by the City. Growing Medium shall be tilled or replaced by the Contractor at their own expense.

REPAIR OF SETTLED GROWING MEDIUM .1

At the end of twelve months after the date of substantial completion of the Growing Medium installation work, inspect the site and restore any areas where the grades have settled beyond the elevations shown on the drawings by an amount greater than 5% of the soil depth. .1 In shrub planting areas where the settlement is 75mm or less, remove the mulch, top dress the area with the specified Growing Medium and re-mulch. All ground cover areas and shrub planting areas where the settlement is greater than 75mm remove the mulch and plants, add the specified Growing Medium, re-plant and re-mulch.

END OF SECTION 32 91 21

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 91 21 GROWING MEDIUM PAGE 17 OF 17

Contractors Submittal Checklist Refer to 32 91 21 specification sections cited for exact requirements. â&#x2C6;&#x161; Spec # Item Certificates 1.3.1 Certificate that all growing medium components and the growing medium meet all environmental standards.

Product Data 1.3.2 Product data: Coarse Sand 1.3.2 Product data: Pine Bark Compost 1.3.2 Product data: Yard Waste Compost Material Source Locations 1.3.3 Location of all topsoil and growing medium sources Samples 1.3.4.1 Two 4 liter samples: Topsoil / submitted with required testing results 1.3.4.1 Two 4 liter samples: Coarse sand / submitted with required testing results 1.3.4.1 Two 4 liter samples: Growing medium / submitted with required testing results 1.3.4.1 Two 4 liter samples: Pine Bark Compost / submitted with required testing results 1.3.4.1 Two 4 liter samples: Yard Waste Compost / submitted with required testing results Testing Reports 1.3.5.4 Particle size analysis: Topsoil including Sand Fractions 1.3.5.4 Particle size analysis: Growing Medium including Sand Fractions 1.3.5.5 Chemical analysis: Topsoil 1.3.5.5 Chemical analysis: Growing Medium w/ lab recommendations for fertilizer applications 1.3.6 In-Situ Compaction Testing: Installed Growing Medium Contractors Qualifications 1.3.10 Documentation of Contractorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Qualifications

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 1 OF 15

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS .1

1.2

Read and be governed by Conditions of the Contract and Sections of Division 1.

RELATED WORK .1

Related Sections include the following: .1

1.3

SCOPE OF WORK .1

This section includes the supply and installation of the following: .1 .2

1.4

Supply and installation of trees and plants.

Regular maintenance of plants for duration of warranty period.

REFERENCE STANDARDS .1

1.5

Section 32 91 21 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Growing Medium

All trees shall be in accordance with the Metric Guide Specification for Nursery Stock most current Edition of the Canadian Nursery Trades Association except where specified otherwise.

QUALITY CONTROL .1

Plant Installer Qualifications: All planting work shall be performed by an experienced contractor who has completed planting work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project and with a record of successful landscape establishment. .1

.2

The plant installation contractor shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience with the installation of soils and plants and large trees in urban conditions similar to the scope of this project.

Plant inspections: .1

The City may inspect plants at any time from initial plant selection through final acceptance at the end of the warrantee period.

.2

Any plant inspection, except the final acceptance, shall not be considered as accepting any plant. It is understood that plant conditions change with time and inspections of plants may miss critical, but difficult to observe conditions within the plants structure or root ball.

.3

Failure of the City to inspect any plant shall not absolve the contractor of responsibility to meet all the requirements of these specifications.

4.

Plant inspections may result in field reports and instructions to the contractor to undertake modifications to processes, procedures or plant maintenance,

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 2 OF 15

necessary to maintain healthy plants. Some of these instructions, such as the need to better protect plants or modify watering rates and timing may be time sensitive in order to be effective. .1

.2 .3

.4

Plants: .1

All plants shall conform to the varieties specified in the plant list and be legibly tagged with their proper name and size. No substitutions will be accepted without written approval by the City.

.2

Imported plants must be accompanied with necessary permits and import licenses. Conform to federal and provincial regulations.

Monitoring tree root ball and planter soil moisture: .1

The Contractor shall monitor the moisture levels in root balls and the planter soil and assure that they are sufficiently moist for optimum root growth and plant health.

.2

The Contractor shall maintain, in operating condition, a soil moisture meter, at the site, at all time they are working to measure root ball and soil moisture. .1

.3

1.6

The moisture meter shall be a General Digital Moisture Meter available from Ben Meadows, www.benmeadows, item number 160670, or approved equal.

Moisture within the root balls and the planter soil adjacent to the root ball shall be maintained between 10 and 20% as measured by the General Digital Moisture Meter. If an alternate moisture meter is approved, the meter reading scale shall be interpolated to the moisture reading scale of the General Digital Moisture Meter.

Submittals .1

Maintenance Instructions: Submit instructions on maintenance procedures to be followed after end of specified maintenance period.

.2

Submit 1kg sample of Crushed Granite Mulch to Engineer for approval before installation.

.3

Submit the name, contact information and qualifications of the plant Installer for approval by the City. Submittal shall include the names and contact information of a minimum of five project references that best represent the firm's qualifications. All representative work shall have been completed within the previous five years.

Submit, for approval by the City, the names and contact information of the grower of all plant sources. Plants shall not be obtained from a re-wholesale supplier.

.4

1.7

The contractor shall respond, in writing, to all field reports and instructions from the City within 24 hours of receipt of any field report or instructions with a confirmation of the receipt of the field report or instruction and how and when the contractor will respond to the request.

Instruction to modify watering rates shall be implemented within 48 hours of the receipt of the request of for modifications.

PRODUCTS DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

.1

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 3 OF 15

After harvesting and prior to shipping any balled and burlapped trees from the growing nursery, notify the City to allow for an inspection of the plants at the growing nursery to assure that all harvesting requirements have been satisfied. .1

Trees shall be spaced such that the City may have access to the root balls of each tree to check the position of the structural roots and the presence of circling and adventitious roots. The contractor shall remove burlap and soil from the top of any root ball requested by the City for the purpose of this inspection.

.2

All trees shall be inspected by the Contractor for damage in transit. No defective material shall be delivered to the site. Material subsequently damaged shall be removed from the site immediately.

.3

All trees may be reviewed by the City at the site and prior to planting. The contractor shall make each root ball accessible to the City by spacing the plants in the storage area such that they can be viewed from all angles. .1

Trees shall be spaced such that the City may have access to the root balls of each tree to check the position of the structural roots and the presence of circling and adventitious roots. The contractor shall remove burlap and soil from the top of any root ball requested by the City for the purpose of this inspection.

.2

Trees that were not harvested correctly at the nursery shall be rejected and alternate replacement trees provided.

.3

In the event that the City is unable to make this inspection, plants may still be rejected at any time if it is found that they do not meet the specification requirements.

.4

Label manufactured, processed or otherwise prepared materials that are packaged to indicate manufacturer, contents, weight, and a detailed description of the material. If delivered in bulk, submit affidavits giving information required as specified for labels and certifying that materials meet specified requirements. Store and protect fertilizer, limestone, bone meal, mulching materials, and similar products to prevent damage from moisture.

.5

No plant shall be accepted when the ball of earth surrounding its root system has been cracked or broken prior to or during planting or after the burlap, staves, ropes or platform required in transplanting has been removed.

.6

Transport plants with branches tied to prevent damage, and padded to avoid abrasion from equipment. All parts of the plant including the branches and root ball shall be covered with a tarp at all times during transit. Moisten the branches and root balls of each tree after loading on the truck, and immediately prior to departure. For shipping distances greater than three hours, mist the trees and root balls in transit every three ours.

.7

Schedule delivery transit for all trees in leaf to occur at night or the early morning hours.

Do not deliver trees in leaf on days when daytime high temperatures are predicted to be above 28 degrees Celsius.

.8

Prevent drying out of roots, root balls, trunks, branches, and leaves of plants from time of harvest until they are planted. While temporarily stored at site, protect them with Bark Mulch or straw, or similar materials and kept moist. Mist plant tops regularly such that plant tops remain moist. Water root zones to maintain water levels in the root zone

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 4 OF 15

above wilt point but below soil saturation considered to be a moisture reading of between 10 and 20% as measured by the General Digital Moisture Meter. .1 Any trees in leaf that are to be stored longer than 48 hours must be placed within a shaded storage area or covered with a mesh tarp. .9

1.8

Job Conditions .1

1.9

Installation of Work of this Section shall be performed under weather conditions and in suitable growth season for each specified plant, and as approved by Engineer.

Acceptance of the Work .1

.2 .3

.4

1.10

If deciduous trees are moved when in leaf, spray with an approved anti-desiccant per manufacturer’s recommendations at nursery no greater than 48 hours prior to digging, and again two weeks after transplanting. Spraying should take place in early morning hours with foliage at maximum turgidity.

The contractor is responsible for review and acceptance of the plant material at the source and – once delivered to the site – for conformance with the contract drawings.

Any material that does not meet the requirements as stipulated here should be flagged and the City notified.

Acceptance of plant material by the City shall be for general conformance to specified size, character and quality and not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for full conformance to the contract documents, including correct species.

The City will inspect all work for substantial completion upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date of inspection. .1 For plants that are dormant at the time of the acceptance inspection, the City may elect to postpone the acceptance of these plants until the next growing season when the plants are actively growing and can be evaluated for viability.

The Contractor is responsible for the condition and quality of work and materials during construction, and until Acceptance. Contractor shall bear the total cost of replacing any and all plant material until the date of acceptance.

Warranty .1

All plants shall be guaranteed for a period of two years following written acceptance of the work by the City in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract and as modified by this section, and shall be alive and in vigorous growth at the end of the guarantee period as determined by the City. .1

.2

Plants shall be healthy, free of pests and disease, and in flourishing condition at the end of the warranty period. Plants shall be free of dead and dying branches and branch tips, and shall bear foliage of normal density, size, and color for the species.

Plants shall be deemed defective that are not in a vigorous, thriving condition including; plants that are dead; have had more than 25% of their branches die or removed; have had a major branch or side of the plant removed such that current or future aesthetic appeal or structural integrity of the plant is compromised; are diseased or insect infested to an extent that cannot be treated; or do not produce leaves and or annual branch tip extensions that are normal to the species, as

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

.3 .4

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 5 OF 15

determined by the City during or at the end of the warranty period. Plants that are defective shall be replaced.

When the work is accepted in parts, the warranty periods shall extend from each of the partial acceptances to the terminal date of the last warranty period. Thus, all warranty periods shall terminate at one time.

The Contractor is exempt from replacing plants, after Acceptance and during the warranty period, that are removed by others, lost or damaged due to occupancy of project in any part, lost or damaged by a third party, vandalism, or any natural disaster.

.2

All plants that, in the opinion of the City, are defective or not in a healthy growing condition, as defined above, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense as soon as weather conditions permit; and within the specified planting period; and prior to terminating his responsibilities under this Contract.

.3

All replacements shall be plants of the same size and variety as specified. The cost or replacement plants including delivery, and installation shall be borne by the Contractor, except for replacement resulting from theft, vandalism, or carelessness on the part of others. The City shall be the sole judge in case of dispute regarding responsibility for replacement of plants.

At the end of the warranty period, the City shall inspect all warranted work, upon written request of the Contractor. The request shall be received at least ten calendar days before the anticipated date for final inspection.

The warranty of all replacement plants shall extend for an additional two-year period from the date of their acceptance after replacement. In the event that a replacement plant is not acceptable during or at the end of the said extended warranty period, the City may elect one more replacement items or credit for each item. These second replacement items are not protected under a warranty period.

Final Acceptance will be given only when all the requirements of this specification have been met.

.4 .5

.6

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

Plants - General .1

Provide trees and plants of quantity, size, genus, species, and variety or cultivars as shown and scheduled in contract documents. Type of root preparation, sizing, grading and quality shall comply with Metric Guide Specification for Nursery Stock most current Edition, except where more stringent requirements are stated in these specifications. .1

All trees shall be certified by the grower to have had all girdling roots above the main structural roots removed including any girdling roots within the interior of the root ball resulting from loose soil on top of the ball or from previous propagation practices or smaller containers.

.2

Source of plants: grown in Zone 5 in accordance with Agriculture Canada Plant Hardiness Zone Map.

.3

Plants: freshly dug, free of disease, insects, defects or injuries and structurally sound with strong fibrous root system and densely foliated, root pruned regularly, but not later than one growing season prior to arrival on site.

.4

Trees (general): Trees shall have straight trunks, well and characteristically branched for species. All trees shall have a central leader to the top of the tree and branches shall be

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 6 OF 15

evenly spaced along the trunk. Trees with co-dominant leaders shall be pruned to remove or suppress one of the co-dominant leaders as directed by the City. Trees with clusters of branches in the bottom half of the canopy, caused by the growers pruning the tree to force a denser canopy, shall be rejected. .5

Measure plants with branches in normal position, finish grade to top of main body of plant, not from branch tip to branch tip or from root base to branch tip. Caliper dimension shall refer to diameter of trunk measured 300 mm above the natural ground line. .1

The natural ground line shall be defined as the point where the trunk begins to flare into several roots forming the root collar and where the trunk bark texture transitions into root bark texture. A single large root emerging perpendicular from the trunk above the trunk flare shall be considered adventitious and removed.

The swelling of the trunk at the point of a previous graft is not the trunk flare.

.6

Plants larger than specified will be accepted without liability to extra charges if approved by the City, and they meet all specified requirements for their size and root balls.

.7

Plant varieties and quantities required for the Project are specified in a plant schedule on the Planting Plan and the specific numbers of plants is indicated on the planting plan. In case of discrepancy in quantity between the Planting Plan, Plant Schedule, or unit price schedule, the quantity of plants drawn on the Planting Plan shall take precedence.

.8

If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size and not less than 50 percent of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required.

.9

Plants shall have outstanding form; symmetrical, with an even branch distribution, densely foliated and/or budded, and a strong, straight distinct leader where this is characteristic of the species. Plants that meet the measurements specified, but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread, shall be rejected. The City shall be the final arbiter of acceptability of plant form.

.10

Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and reasonably free of significant disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, scrapes, broken or split branches, fresh limb cuts, sunscald, injuries, abrasions, or disfigurement. All graft unions shall be completely healed. All graft unions shall be visible above the soil line

.11

Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees, which have a damaged or crooked leader, or multiple leaders, unless specifically specified, will be rejected. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cut of limbs over 25 mm, which have not completely callused, will be rejected.

.12

All trees shall be dug prior to leafing out (bud break) in the spring or after plants have gone dormant in the fall except for the plants known to require spring transplanting, which are only to be dug prior to leafing out in the spring. Plants to be shipped or installed when in leaf shall be pre-dug prior to bud break and stored at the growerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s nursery in shaded, irrigated areas with their root balls covered in Bark Mulch. Trees shall be stored with the central leader in a vertical position

.13

Submit the growers certification that all trees have been root pruned; all girdling and circling roots above the top structural roots have been removed; and that all soil has been removed above the natural ground line of the tree prior to digging and harvesting the trees.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES 2.2

Plants - Balled and Burlapped Trees .1

2.3

.1

Prior to digging each tree check for the location of the natural ground line; as defined in paragraph “Plants General: subparagraph .5 above; and the depth of the first main structural roots within the root ball area. Using hand tools remove the soil around the trunk of the plant to locate the position and depth of the structural roots. The City may randomly check individual trees including removing soil from the base of the trunk to inspect roots.

.2

A minimum of three radial roots shall be found in each plant. The top structural roots shall be defined as large woody roots roughly radial to the trunk and at approximately the same depth with a diameter greater than ½ of the trunk caliper. Adventitious and circling roots above the top structural roots shall be removed and the plant shall be rejected if these roots are of sufficient number or size that removal will compromise the future health of the plant.

.3

Apply a 25 mm diameter, dot of paint or permanent marker on the north side of all trees 300 mm above the natural ground line.

.4

Prior to digging any tree, using hand tools, carefully removed the soil from the top of the root ball to the natural ground line. . Care must be exercised not to damage the bark of the root flare and the top of the structural roots.

.5

Plants shall be burlap wrapped either using Metric Guide Specification For Nursery Stock, most current edition, drum lacing technique or a wire basket. If wire baskets are used, a low profile basket shall be used. A low profile basket is defined as having the top of the highest loops on the basket no less that 100 mm and no greater than 200 mm below the shoulder of the root ball.

.6

Twine and burlap used for wrapping the root ball shall be natural, untreated, biodegradable material.

.7

Apply 3mm thick, wax sealed, corrugated cardboard trunk protection around the trunk of the tree from the top of the root ball to the first branch. Cardboard shall be coated to reduce water penetration, and fabricated for this application. Secure the cardboard with biodegradable twine.

Trees that have been grown in a container or which are placed in a container at the end of the growing period, (containerized trees) shall not be permitted.

Water .1

2.5

All Trees shall be field grown and dug balled and burlapped and shall be harvested with the following modifications to standard nursery practices.

Plants - Container Grown Trees .1

2.4

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 7 OF 15

Potable and free of impurities that would inhibit plant growth.

Tree Guying Material .1

Tree guying to be flat woven polypropylene material, 20mm wide, 400 kg breaking strength. Color to be Green. Product to be ArborTie, manufactured by Deep Root Partners, L.P. (800) 458-7668, or approved equal.

.2

Dead man shall be 89mm x 89mm x 1200mm untreated wood #3 or better SPF.

.3

Stakes shall be 35mm x 35mm x 1800mm untreated hardwood stakes, tree of knots.

Sharpened at one end with an approximately 60-degree angle point.

.4

Submit manufacturers’ product data for approval.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

2.6

Crushed Granite Mulch (inorganic mulch within tree spaces) .1 .2

2.7

Crushed granite; size - 19mm +/-;.color – Caledonia grey or approved equal.

Submit manufacturers product data, and a 1-kilo sample for approval.

Bark Mulch .1 .2

2.7

2.8

2.9

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 8 OF 15

Shredded hardwood bark mulch.

Submit manufacturers product data, and a 1-kilo sample for approval.

Anti-desiccant .1

Anti-desiccant shall be emulsion type, film-forming agent similar to Dowax by Dow Chemical Company, or Wilt-Pruf by Nursery Specialty Products, Inc., Croton Falls, New York, designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of moisture from plants.

Deliver in manufacturer’s fully identified containers and use in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2

Submit manufacturers product data for approval.

Tree Bark Protector .1

Tree Bark Protectors shall be black extruded resin mesh, 100mm diameter, 1500mm long. As manufactured by Industrial Netting, Minneapolis, MN, USA or approved equal

.2

For trees where the distance from the top of the rootball to the first branch is less than 1500mm, cut the tube to the required length.

.3

Fasten the split side of the Tree Bark Protector together in three places with black plastic tape.

.4

Submit manufacturers’ product data for approval.

Bike Warning Sign .1

120mm x 120mm x 1.5mm thick. black plastic sign with white coating on face engraved text (serif font, centre justified, capitalized letters, 6 lines) reads: LOCKING OF / BICYCLES / PROHIBITED / BICYCLES WILL / BE REMOVED AT / OWNER’S RISK Only the word ‘PROHIBITED’ is bold.

.2 .3

2 holes punched at top and 2 at bottom, approx. 5mm dia.

Black cable zip ties through the holes horizontally and attached to the black plastic mesh Tree Bark Protector.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 9 OF 15

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

SITE EXAMINATION .1

Examine the surface grades and soil conditions for any circumstances that might be detrimental to plant growth, such as deposits of construction-related waste or soil contamination, storage of material or equipment, soil compaction or poor drainage.

Examine the grading, verify all elevations, and notify the City in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.

3.2

PRE PLANTING MEETING .1 Prior to the start of planting attend a pre planting meeting with the City to review the planting requirements and inspect the conditions of the planting area. During this meeting and in the presence of the City, the contractor shall install one tree to serve as the example of a tree that meets all the requirements of this specification.

3.2

PLANTING SEASON .1

Planting shall only be performed when weather and soil conditions are suitable for planting the materials specified in accordance with locally accepted practice. Install plant materials during the planting time as described below unless otherwise approved in writing by the City. In the event that the contractor request planting outside the dates of the planting season, approval of the request does not change the requirements of the warranty.

Deciduous Trees except those known to require spring only transplanting: March 1 - June 15 and September 1 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; October 30 Deciduous Trees known to require spring only transplanting: March 1 - June 15 The Toronto Department of Urban Forestry shall determine which trees shall require spring only transplanting.

.2

3.3

No plant shall be harvested or transported from the time of bud break until the newly formed leaves are fully developed and matured. Any plant to be planted during the spring planting season after the emergence of leaves, shall be harvested prior to bud break and stored in a partially shaded area, protected from winds. The root ball shall be kept moist and the top of the plant misted daily until the appropriate time of shipping.

Plants to be planted in the fall planting season shall not be harvested until after August 15.

FINAL INSPECTION OF ROOT BALLS .1

The contractor shall inspect each plant after delivery and prior to installation for damage of other characteristics that may cause rejection of the plant. Notify the City of any condition observed.

.2

Note the location of the white dot on the tree base and record the distance from the center of the dot to the top of the root ball. The white dot should be approximately 300mm above the top of the soil within the root ball at the point where the soil meets the trunk. Note any discrepancies from the required dimension and immediately notify the City if the distance is greater than +/- 50mm. Trees that do not comply with the required

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 10 OF 15

remediation of the root ball soil level may be rejected, or the City may direct the contractor to remove soil from the top of the structural roots or may reject the tree.

3.4

PREPARATION OF PLANTING BEDS .1

3.5

SOIL COMPACTION UNDER TREE ROOT BALLS .1

3.6

Preparation of planting beds is specified in Section Growing Medium and as indicated on details.

Prior to placing any tree assure that the Growing Medium under the root ball is compacted to between as required in section â&#x20AC;&#x153;Growing Mediumâ&#x20AC;? for the entire depth of the Growing Medium. If there is more than 300mm of under compacted Growing Medium under the root ball, excavate the first 300mm of Growing Medium and compact the lower layer of Growing Medium prior to compacting the top 300 mm Growing Medium below the root ball.

PLANTING .1

Final location of all plants to be approved by Engineer prior to installation.

.2

Trees: .1

Excavate the planting hole approximately 200mm wider than the actual root ball diameter or to the edge of the planting space and to the depth of the root ball.

Do not over excavate.

.2

Set shoulder or the top of the outer edge of the root ball at the elevation of the proposed finish soil grade. Consult the grading plan and utilize a builders level or transit to determine the grade at the tree grade. For trees on sloped surfaces, set the top of the outer edge of the root ball at the average grade around the tree.

Set the plant plumb and in the location indicated on the plan and approved by the City. The root flare and tree graft, if applicable, shall be visible at the top of the root ball, above the grade. Do not place soil on top of the root ball.

.3

Trees shall be oriented so their north side, as marked by the white dot on the trunk in the nursery, faces north. The City may require trees to be oriented slightly in another direction based on the form of the tree or other conditions.

.4

When set, brace root ball by tamping backfilled soil around the lower portion of the root ball. Place additional backfill around base and sides of ball in 150mm lifts. Work each lift to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately two-thirds full, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Ropes or strings on top of ball shall be cut and shall be pulled back. Burlap or cloth wrapping shall be cut and removed from at least the top half of the root ball. The top horizontal ring of support wire baskets shall be cut and removed entirely from the top half of the wire basket. Folding the burlap or wire basket down into the soil will not be acceptable.

.5

Repeat watering until no more is absorbed. Water again after placing final layer of backfill.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

3.7

3.8

3.9

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 11 OF 15

.3

Remove all nursery plant identification tags and ribbons. The City’s seals are to remain on plants until the end of the warranty period, or as directed. The Contractor shall remove the City’s seals at the end of the warrantee period.

.4

Dispose of burlap, wire and container material off site.

TREE BARK PROTECTOR .1

Apply the Tree Bark Protector to each tree using the specified black plastic tape in three places to connect together the open sides of the mesh tube.

.2

Apply the specified “Bike warning” sign using black plastic “zip ties” to each Tree Bark Protector. Cut off any excess tie material extending past the lock end of the tie

TREE GUYING .1

Maintain all trees in a plumb position throughout the warranty period. Straighten all trees including those not guyed. Plants to be straightened shall be excavated and the root ball moved to a plumb position, and then re-backfilled. Do not straighten plants by pulling the trunk with guys.

.2

Do not guy trees unless specifically required by the Contract Documents, requested by the City, or in the event that the Contractor request that guying should be permitted as the only alternative way to keep particular trees plumb. .1

The Contractor shall submit a written request for approval by the City to guy any trees not required by the Contract Documents.

.2

Trees that are guyed shall have their guys removed after four months for spring planted trees and after 12 months for summer or fall planted trees or at other times as approved.

.3

Tree guying shall not be permitted as a way to stabilize a tree that is loose in its rootball. All such trees shall be rejected and replaced.

.3

Tree guying, when permitted shall utilize the tree guying materials specified.

.4

Guying material shall be tied to the tree in such a manner as to create a minimum 300mm loop to prevent girdling. Knots shall be a type that does not slip, constricting the trunk. Plants shall stand plumb after guying.

MULCHING .1

Place mulch in the bed to a maximum depth of 50mm such that the entire bed is covered in mulch but mulch does not cover the stem of the plant emerging out of the soil. .1

Utilize Crushed Granite Mulch in tree spaces smaller than 3.5 square meters.

.2

Utilize Bark Mulch in all beds 3.5 square meters or larger.

.2

Ensure soil settlement has been corrected prior to mulching.

.3

Ensure ground is not frozen prior to mulching.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES 3.10

3.11

3.12

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 12 OF 15

PRUNING .1

Prune plants as directed by the City at the time of planting and preserve the natural character of the plant. Pruning shall follow recommendations in “An Illustrated Guide to Pruning, Second Edition” by Ed Gillman.

.2

An arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture shall perform all pruning.

.3

Wherever possible and appropriate to the species preserve or create a central leader.

Subordinate co-dominant leaders may be tip pruned to suppress lower growth to prepare these leaders for later removal, leaving the single central leader.

.4

Remove and replace excessively pruned or malformed stock resulting from improper pruning.

.5

Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp, rust-free tools. Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. No tree paint or sealants shall be used.

.6

Dead wood, suckers, and broken and badly bruised branches shall be removed. Do not prune plant material that has been severely damaged due to transit or handling until viewed by the City.

.7

Pruning of broken or dead branches shall be done after planting, and before acceptance.

Pruning procedures shall be reviewed with the City before proceeding. Proceed with pruning in the manner approved by the City.

.8

Form-corrective pruning may occur when tree has become dormant until bud-break in the spring. If corrective pruning dates fall outside the construction schedule, it shall be completed at the next pruning season.

WATERING .1

The Contractor shall be fully responsible to ensure that adequate water is provided to all plants from the point of installation until the date of acceptance. The contractor shall adjust the automatic irrigation system, if available, and shall apply additional water, using hoses as required.

.2

During the initial establishment period, and particularly immediately after installation do not rely on the irrigation system to water the plants. Plants will uptake water only within the root ball and a short distance outside the ball. It is possible to over water the soil while under watering the root ball with the irrigation system.

.3

Hand water root balls of all plants and the soil immediately around the root ball to assure that the root balls have adequate moisture. Test the moisture content in each root ball to determine the water content. Maintain root ball moisture and soil beyond the root ball moisture between 10 and 20% as measured using a General Digital Moisture Meter. Do not over water the soil around the plants. Use “Tree Gator Bags” to assist in watering trees.

WATERING SOIL UNDER THE PAVEMENT .1

Add water into the passive sub-paving watering system to hydrate the Growing Medium within the Growing Medium zones below the pavement. Using a watering truck add water until the system pipes begin to refuse to take on more water and back up into the inlet. After 24 hours, repeat the process.

.2

24 hours after the second water application, measure the soil moisture at each soil inspection port. Report the meter readings to the City. If the soil moisture reading is below 10% apply water to those zones a third time until the water backs up into the inlet.

Retest the soil moisture and report the readings to the City.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES 3.13

FERTILIZER .1

If any trees leaves are not of a dark green color similar to a vigorous tree of the same species as determined by the City, apply granular fertilizer of liquid fertilizer at rates and times as directed by the City. .1

3.14

3.13

3.14

3.15

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 13 OF 15

Remove a sample of leaves from several of the trees with differing leaf color and send to a foliar testing lab for analysis. Follow the fertilizer recommendations of the foliar test results and as directed by the City.

CLEAN-UP .1

During installation, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition.

.2

Keep the site free of garbage at all times. Immediately dispose of wrappings or waste materials associated with products necessary for the completion of the work.

.3

All garbage shall be kept in a central collection container. Do not bury garbage in backfill.

.4

Once installation is complete, remove any excess soil from pavements or embedded fixtures. Ensure that mulch is confined to planting beds and that all tags and flagging tape are removed from the site. The City’s seals are to remain on each tree.

PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION .1

The Contractor shall protect all work and materials from damage due to planting operations; operations by other Contractors; or trespassers. Maintain protection during installation until acceptance. Treat, repair or replace damaged work immediately.

.2

Damage done to any of the work by the Contractor, or any of their sub-contractors, shall be replaced by the Contractor at their own expense.

PLANT MAINTENANCE PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE .1

During the project and prior to Acceptance, the Contractor shall maintain the site, including completed work and existing conditions.

.2

Maintenance during the period prior to Acceptance shall consist of pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mulching, removal of dead material, repairing and replacing of tree stakes, tightening and repairing of guys, repairing and replacing of damaged tree trunk protectors, resetting plants to proper grades and upright position, and furnishing and applying such sprays as are necessary to keep plantings free of insects and disease, and in healthy growing condition. Planting areas shall be kept free of trash, weeds, grass, and other undesirable vegetative growth.

.3

Remove all tree guying after the end of the first growing season or as soon as the tree has stabilized. Removal of guying and wrapping is part of the installation work even if that work is required to occur after the date of acceptance.

MAINTENANCE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD .1

During the 24-month warrantee period, provide all maintenance for all plantings to keep the plants in a healthy state and the planting areas clean and neat. .1

These maintenance requirements do not apply during any extended warranty period, to any plant, where the City elects to extend the warranty under provisions in Part 1, paragraph “Warrantee” subparagraph .5.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES .2

.3

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 14 OF 15

All maintenance work shall be undertaken by trained plant maintenance crews under the supervision of a foreman with a minimum of 5 years experience supervising commercial plant maintenance crews. .1

All chemical and fertilizer applications shall be made by licensed applicators for the type of chemicals to be used. All work and chemical use shall comply with all applicable local, provincial and federal requirements.

.2

Assure that hoses and watering equipment and other maintenance equipment does not block paths or be placed in a manner that may create tripping hazards.

Use standard safety warning barriers and other procedures to maintain the site in a safe manner for visitors at all times.

.3

All maintenance workers shall wear company uniforms that clearly identifies them as employees of the maintenance company. All workers shall wear required safety equipment and apparel appropriate for the tasks being undertaken.

4.

The contractor shall not store maintenance equipment at the site at times when they are not in use.

5.

Maintenance vehicles shall not park on walks and planting areas at any time.

Provide the following maintenance tasks: .1

Maintenance logs: Maintain a detailed log of all maintenance activities including types of tasks date of task, types and quantities of materials and products used, watering times and amounts, and number of each crew. Periodically review the logs with the City, and submit a copy of the logs at the end of each year of the maintenance agreement.

.2

Watering; Provide all water required to keep soil within and around the root balls and in the sub paving soil at optimum moisture content for plant growth. .1

Maintain all watering systems and equipment and keep them operational.

Monitor soil moisture to provide sufficient water. Check soil moisture and root ball moisture with a soil moisture meter on a regular basis and record moisture readings. Do not over water.

.2

Each year, winterize all watering systems to prevent winter damage and make the system operational in the spring.

.3

Soil nutrient levels: Take a minimum of 6 foliar tissue samples from around the site twice a year in the spring and fall and have them tested by a recognize soil testing lab for chemical composition of plant required nutrients, pH, salt and % organic matter. Test results shall include laboratory recommendations for nutrient applications. Apply fertilizers at rates recommended by the soil test.

Use only organic fertilizers with a salt index of 25 or less.

.4

Plant pruning: Prune plants to maintain natural appearance. Review the plantings once a year to evaluate for pruning needs. Remove cross over branching, developing co dominant leaders in trees, dead wood and winterdamaged branches. Do not over prune or shear plants.

.5

Restore plants: Reset any plants that have settled or are leaning as soon as the condition is noticed.

CITY OF TORONTO TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES

.4

SECTION 32 93 00 PLANTING PAGE 15 OF 15

.6

Guying: Remove tree guides and staking after the first full growing season.

.7

Weed control: Hand remove all weeds and any plants that do not appear on the planting plan. Chemical weed control is not permitted. Schedule Weeding shall be as needed but not less than 5 times a year. Schedule weeding days prior to major events as requested by the City.

.8

Trash removal: Remove all trash and debris from all planting beds and maintain the beds in a neat and tidy appearance. The number of trash and debris removal visits shall be no less than 8 times per year. Schedule trash removal days after major events as requested by the City.

.9

Disease and insect control: Provide Integrated plant management (IPM) program to maintain disease and insects at acceptable and manageable levels.

Manageable levels shall be defined as minimum damage to plants. Use least invasive methods to control plant disease and insect outbreaks. The City must approve in advance the use of all chemical pesticide applications.

.10

Plant replacement: Replace all plants that are dead or determined by the City to be defective as defined in Part One Paragraph â&#x20AC;&#x153;Warranteeâ&#x20AC;?, as soon as the plant condition is obvious and in suitable weather and season for planting.

.11

Mulch: Refresh any areas of Bark Mulch once a year to maintain complete coverage. Do not over mulch. At no time shall the overall mulch thickness be greater that 50mm. Do not apply mulch against the trunks or stems of any plants. Replacement mulch shall meet the requirements of the original approved material.

.12

Leaf, fruit and other plant debris removal: Remove fall leaf, spent flowers, fruit and plant part accumulations from beds and paved surfaces. Maintain all surface water drains free of debris. Debris removal shall be undertaken at each visit to weed or pick up trash in beds

Maintenance meetings: Meet with the City a minimum of three times a year to review the progress and discuss any changes that are needed in the maintenance program. At the end of the warrantee period attend a hand over meeting to formally transfer the responsibilities of maintenance to the City or their designated representative. Provide all information on past maintenance activities and provide a list of critical tasks that will be needed over the next 12 months. Provide all maintenance logs and soil test data. Make the contractorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s supervisor available for a minimum of one year after the end of the warrantee period to answer questions about past maintenance.

END OF SECTION 32 93 00

Appendix C

Cost Comparison

The cost comparison included in this Appendix has been prepared in order to understand the initial cost of installation for all the different tree planting solutions, including current City standards and the proposed tree planting solutions.

The comparison is based on a 10m stretch for all of the planting systems. This allowed the team to get an accurate picture of what each planting system is achieving (cubic meters of soil) in an identical streetscape scenario.

It has to be mentioned that for the open planters the 10m length analysis was modified since one planter includes two trees. Therefore for the proposed new planter system, we analysed the whole planter length and the immediate surrounding surface pavement and divided into two. For the existing open planter (T1-A-2c) we assumed the same longitudinal dimensions of the proposed planter (14m, with trees spaced 10m o.c.) and we added the covered trench that links other adjacent planters to have total length of 20m and then divided the amount in half.

Summary

Total cost per tree

8.8

$5,806

$664

11.6

$6,544

$564

10.5

$7,293

$695

8.7

$8,195

$942

20.6

$8,692

$422

20.9

$15,190

$727

21.0

$16,699

$795

21.0

$20,890

$995

19.6

$6,339

$323

16.8

$7,166

$427

28.3

$15,501

22.4

$14,772

Current Santdards T1-A-2b (Continuous Soil Trench: Open Planting Bed and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover) T1-A-2c (Continuous Soil Trench: Open Planting Bed and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover) T2-A (Continuous Soil Trench: Raised Planter and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover) T3-A (Continuous Soil Trench: Precast Concrete Planter Cover and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench None of the above hit the 15m3 target

Rate of cost per mÂł of Rank soil

Soil Volume mÂł

Proposed Drawings Type-1A Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete Panels over Continuous Growing Medium Trench -Design load for Kubota maintenance vehicle Type-1B Precast Structural Concrete Panels & Unit Paving over Continuous Growing Medium Trench -Design load for Kubota maintenance vehicle Type-2 Soil Cells in Continuous Growing Medium Trench with Concrete Paving on Grade -Design load for large semi-truck and trailer Type-2 Soil Cells in Continuous Growing Medium Trench with Unit Paving and Concrete Base on Grade -Design load for large semi-truck and trailer Type-3 Open Planter with Curb Wall Type-3 Open Planter with Seat Wall Type-1A.2 Hybrid Option Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete Panels over Continuous Growing Medium Trench & Soil Cells -Design load for Kubota maintenance vehicle Type-3.2 Hybrid Option Open Planter with Soil Cells

2

Good value for the cost cost per tree under $10,000

Good value for the cost cost per tree under $16,000

1

Best value for the cost cost per tree under $10,000

$548

3

Best value for the cost cost per tree under $16,000

$659

4

Good value for the cost cost per tree under $16,000

$80 $20 $10 $220 $2 $140 $2 $85

$300 $2

$300

m m2 2 m m3 kg m kg

3

m2

m kg

3

m3

8.75 20 4 0.9 41.4 10 46 1

3.2 384

0.45

Total

$45

m3

Rate

21

Unit

$5,806

N/A $960 $768 N/A N/A N/A $135 N/A

N/A $945 N/A $700 $400 $40 $198 $83 $1,400 $92 N/A $85

Subtotal 21

2

2.4 288

5.2

11.6 26 4 0.9 41.4 10 46

Qty

m3

3

m kg

m2

3

m m2 2 m m3 kg m kg

m3

Unit

Total

$300

$300 $2

$85

$80 $20 $10 $220 $2 $140 $2

$45

Rate

$6,544

N/A $720 $576 N/A N/A N/A $600 N/A

Subtotal N/A $945 N/A $928 $520 $40 $198 $83 $1,400 $92 N/A $442

-10m long X 1.8m wide section -1800mm X 14000mm tree opening -1800mm wide soil trench connecting planters with removable cover -Minimum sidewalk work adjacent to planter (500mm) & 800mm Decorative Banding/Apron on the curb side -Full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work

-10m long X 1.8m wide section -1800mm X 1800mm tree opening with concrete curb -1800mm wide soil trench connecting planters with removable cover -Minimum sidewalk work adjacent to planter (500mm) & 800mmDecorative Banding/Apron on the curb side -Full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work

Qty

T1-A-2c Open Planter and Covered Trench: Open Planting Bed and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover

T1-A-2b Continuous Soil Trench: Open Planting Bed and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover

1. Amounts shown above do not include soft costs or any other general requirements or fees.

Notes:

* = cost identical for all types and omitted

Major Items Removals * Excavation Soil Trench Subdrain + Clear Stone * Soil + Mulch Geo-membrane Bitumous Board Concrete Footing for Sidewalk - Concrete Concrete Footing for Sidewalk - Steel Concrete Curb + Saddle - Concrete Concrete Curb + Saddle - Steel Decorative Banding + Concrete Apron * Concrete Sidewalk/Base + Compacted Granular Concrete Unit Paving + Sand Setting Bed Soil Cells Reinforced Concrete Trench Cover (CIP) - Concrete Reinforced Concrete Trench Cover (CIP) - Steel Granular "A" Precast Concrete Slab Watering + Aeration System * Precast Concrete Curb / Raised Planter / Planter Cover Tree *

Assumptions

Description

21

0.8

3 360

15

10.5 22 4 0.9 41.4 10 46

Qty

m3

3

m kg

m2

3

m m2 2 m m3 kg m kg

m3

Unit

Total

$450

$300 $2

$85

$80 $20 $10 $220 $2 $140 $2

$45

Rate

$7,293

N/A $900 $720 N/A N/A N/A $360 N/A

Subtotal N/A $945 N/A $840 $440 $40 $198 $83 $1,400 $92 N/A $1,275

-10m long X 3.5m wide section -1830mm X 3000mm raised planter -1830mm wide soil trench with removable cover -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work

T2-A Continuous Soil Trench: Raised Planter and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover

Current City Standards

21

3

m kg

m2

m3 2 m 2 m m3 kg m kg

m3

Unit

2 each

3.9 468

15

8.7 18 4 0.9 41.4 10 46

Qty

Total

$500

$300 $2

$85

$80 $20 $10 $220 $2 $140 $2

$45

Rate

$8,195

N/A $1,170 $936 N/A N/A N/A $1,000 N/A

Subtotal N/A $945 N/A $696 $360 $40 $198 $83 $1,400 $92 N/A $1,275

-10m long X 3.5m wide section -1460mm X 1460mm tree opening with precast concrete planter cover -1830mm wide soil trench with removable cover -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work

T3-A Continuous Soil Trench: Precast Concrete Planter Cover and Concrete Sidewalk with CIP Trench Cover

$150 $2

$300 $2

m kg

m3 kg

10 46

6.3 882

Total

$80 $20 $10

3

m m2 m2

20.6 22 5.3

m

29

$45

Rate

3

Unit

$8,692

N/A $1,890 $1,764 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Subtotal N/A $1,305 N/A $1,648 $440 $53 N/A N/A $1,500 $92 N/A N/A

27 m

2

Total

$200

$85 $120

2

6 30.75 m 2 m

$80 $20 $10 $220 $2 $150 $2

3

$45

Rate

m m2 m2 3 m kg m kg

m

3

Unit

20.9 22 5.3 0.9 41.4 10 46

34.5

Qty

$15,190

Subtotal N/A $1,553 N/A $1,672 $440 $53 $198 $83 $1,500 $92 N/A $510 $3,690 N/A N/A N/A N/A $5,400 N/A N/A N/A

-10m long x 3.5m wide section -1500mm x 1500mm tree opening -2400mm wide soil trench with precast structural slab and concrete pavers -1000mm depth -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work -design live load: 4.8kPa UDL or 2-12 kN moving point loads @ 1070 c/c (eg. Kubota maintenance vehicle)

-10m long x 3.5m wide section -1500mm x 1500mm tree opening -2400mm wide soil trench with CIP structural slab -1000mm depth -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work -design live load: 4.8kPa UDL or 2-12 kN moving point loads @ 1070 c/c (eg. Kubota maintenance vehicle)

Qty

Type-1B Precast Structural Concrete Panels over Continuous Growing Medium Trench

Type-1A Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete Panels over Continuous Growing Medium Trench

1. Amounts shown above do not include soft costs or any other general requirements or fees.

Notes:

* = cost identical for all types and omitted

Major Items Removals * Excavation Soil Trench Subdrain + Clear Stone * Soil + Mulch Geo-membrane Bitumous Board Concrete Footing for Sidewalk - Concrete Concrete Footing for Sidewalk - Steel Concrete Curb + Saddle - Concrete Concrete Curb + Saddle - Steel Decorative Banding + Concrete Apron * Concrete Sidewalk/Base + Compacted Granular Concrete Unit Paving + Sand Setting Bed Soil Cells Reinforced Concrete Trench Cover (CIP) - Concrete Reinforced Concrete Trench Cover (CIP) - Steel Granular "A" Precast Concrete Slab Watering + Aeration System * Precast Concrete Curb / Raised Planter / Planter Cover Tree *

Assumptions

Description

21 4

37

0.65

26

22.5

30.75

Qty

m

3

Total

$450

$30

$427

m2

t

$85

$80 $15

$45

Rate

m2

3

m m2

m

3

Unit

$16,699

Subtotal N/A $1,665 N/A $1,680 $60 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A $2,614 N/A $9,608 N/A N/A $780 N/A N/A $293 N/A

-10m long x 3.5m wide section -1500mm x 1500mm tree opening -2400mm wide soil trench with concrete sidewalk on grade over soil cells -1000mm depth -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work -vehicle loading up to AASHTO H-20 rating of 14,500 kg per axle (large semi-truck and trailer)

Type-2 Soil Cells in Continuous Growing Medium Trench with Concrete Paving on Grade

Proposed Drawings

21 4

42

0.65

35.2

30.75 30.75 22.5

Qty

m

t

3

m2 2 m m2

3

m m2

m

3

Unit

Total

$450

$30

$85 $120 $427

$80 $15

$45

Rate

$20,890

N/A $1,890 N/A $1,680 $60 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A $2,614 $3,690 $9,608 N/A N/A $1,056 N/A N/A $293 N/A

Subtotal

-10m long x 3.5m wide section -1500mm x 1500mm tree opening -2400mm wide soil trench with concrete unit pavers on grade over soil cells -1000mm depth; full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work -vehicle loading up to AASHTO H-20 rating of 14,500 kg per axle (large semi-truck and trailer)

Type-2 Soil Cells in Continuous Growing Medium Trench with Unit Paving and Concrete Base on Grade

$80 $20 $220 $2 $150 $2 $85

$30

$450

m m2 m3 kg m kg m2

t

m3

19.6 20 3.4 156.4 7 32.2 5.2

5.8

0.7

Total

$45

3

m

Rate

28.1

Unit 3

Qty

$6,339

Subtotal N/A $1,265 N/A $1,568 $400 N/A $748 $313 $1,050 $64 N/A $442 N/A N/A N/A N/A $174 N/A N/A $315 N/A

-10m long x 2.8 wide section -2400mm x 14000mm open planter -2400mm wide soil trench -1200mm depth -Minimum sidewalk work adjacent to planter (500mm) & 800mm Decorative Banding/Apron on the curb side -Full reconstruction

Type-3 Open Planter with Low Curb

4

5.8

7

5.15 236.9

16.8 20

18.8

Qty

m3

t

m2

m3 kg

3

m m2

m

3

Unit

Total

$550

$30

$85

$220 $2

$80 $20

$45

Rate

$7,166

Subtotal N/A $846 N/A $1,344 $400 N/A $1,133 $474 N/A N/A N/A $595 N/A N/A N/A N/A $174 N/A N/A $2,200 N/A

-10m long x 2.4 wide section -2000mm x 14000mm open planter -2000mm wide soil trench -1200mm depth -Minimum sidewalk work adjacent to planter (1000mm) -Full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work

Type-3 Open Planter with Seat Wall

1. Amounts shown above do not include soft costs or any other general requirements or fees.

Notes:

* = cost identical for all types and omitted

Major Items Removals * Excavation Soil Trench Subdrain + Clear Stone * Soil + Mulch Geo-membrane Bitumous Board Concrete Footing for Sidewalk - Concrete Concrete Footing for Sidewalk - Steel Concrete Curb + Saddle - Concrete Concrete Curb + Saddle - Steel Decorative Banding + Concrete Apron * Concrete Sidewalk/Base + Compacted Granular Concrete Unit Paving + Sand Setting Bed Soil Cells Reinforced Concrete Trench Cover (CIP) - Concrete Reinforced Concrete Trench Cover (CIP) - Steel Granular "A" Precast Concrete Slab Watering + Aeration System * Precast Concrete Curb / Raised Planter / Planter Cover Tree *

Assumptions

Description

40

m3

Total

$550

6.5 6.3 882 10

4.1

$427 $300 $2 $30

2

m 3 m kg t

$90

$80 $20 $10 $220 $2 $150 $2

$45

Rate

m2

3

m m2 m2 m3 kg m kg

m

3

Unit

6

28.3 4 5.3 0.6 27.6 10 46

Qty

$15,501

Subtotal N/A $1,800 N/A $2,264 $80 $53 $132 $55 $1,500 $92 N/A $540 N/A $2,776 $1,890 $1,764 $300 N/A N/A $2,255 N/A

-10m long x 4.1m wide section -1500mm x 1500mm tree opening -2400mm + 600mm (under Soil Cell) wide soil trench with CIP structural slab -1000mm depth -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work -design live load: 4.8kPa UDL or 2-12 kN moving point loads @ 1070 c/c (eg. Kubota maintenance vehicle)

Type-1A.2 Hybrid Option Cast-in-Place Structural Concrete Panels over Continuous Growing Medium Trench & Soil Cells

Proposed Drawings

40

0.64

10

17

13.3

6 276

22.4 10

Qty

m3

t

m

2

m2

m3 kg

3

m m2

m

3

Unit

Total

$550

$30

$427

$90

$220 $2

$80 $20

$45

Rate

$14,772

Subtotal N/A $1,800 N/A $1,792 $200 N/A $1,320 $552 N/A N/A N/A $1,197 N/A $7,259 N/A N/A $300 N/A N/A $352 N/A

-10.0m long x 3.8 wide section -1500mm x 14000mm raised planter -1500mm wide soil trench, 1200mm depth + 1200mm continuous belowground trench (under Soil Cell on one side of the planter) -full reconstruction -no allowances for utility-related work

Type 3.2 Hybrid Option Open Planter with Soil Cells

Appendix D

Nashdene Yard Demonstration Project

TREE PLANTING SOLUTIONS IN HARD BOULEVARD SURFACES PILOT PROJECT #1. NASHDENE YARD SILVA CELL UTILITY SERVICING TEST INSTALLATION Specifications Oct. 24, 2011

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Selected Site Demolition

Section 02225 Page 1 October 24, 2011

PART 1 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; GENERAL 1.1

General Requirements

.1 1.2

Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

Summary

.1 Removal of all existing paving and various items as shown on the drawings and as indicated in phasing sequence by the Owner. .2 Removal of excess excavated material.

1.3

Protection .1 Protect existing items designated to remain and material designated for salvage or for reuse. In event of damage, immediately replace such items or make repairs to approval of Consultant and at no additional cost to Owner.

1.4

Quality Control .1 Provide a Waste Reduction Work Plan in compliance with Ontario regulations proposing specific measures for reducing, reusing and recycling generated waste.

1.5

Waste Management and Disposal .1 Comply with the requirements of Sections: 01810, and 01742, including, but not limited to, the following: .1 Waste Management and Disposal .1 Comply with the waste management plan developed by the Construction Manager for the Work in accordance with Sections: 01810 and 01742.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 .1

Preparation Inspect site and verify with Consultant items designated for removal and items to be preserved.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Selected Site Demolition 3.2

Section 02225 Page 2 October 24, 2011

Removal .1 Remove items indicated. Do not disturb adjacent items designated to remain in place. .2 Square up adjacent surfaces to remain in place by saw cutting or other approved method.

3.3

Salvage .1 Carefully dismantle items containing materials directed or indicated for salvage.

Stockpile salvaged materials at locations directed or indicated. .1 Salvage existing traffic and parking signs, parking meters, lighting standards, and emergency call poles for re-installation. .2 Store salvaged items in area designated by Owner. .3 Remove footings and clean posts ready for re-installation. .4 Disconnect and stub off electrical cables.

3.4

Sealing .1 Seal pipe ends and walls of manholes or catch basins where indicated or directed by Consultant. Securely plug to form a watertight seal.

3.5

Disposal of Material

.1 3.6

Dispose of materials off site that are not designated for salvage or re-use in work.

Backfill

.1 Backfill in accordance with Section 02316.

3.7

Restoration .1 Upon completion of work, remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean.

END OF SECTION

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Site

Section 02316 Page 1 October 24, 2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

General Requirements .1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

1.2

Definitions .1 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, including dense tills, hardpan, frozen materials and partially cemented materials which can be ripped and excavated with heavy hydraulic excavating equipment .2 Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in work or surplus to requirements to be disposed off site. .3 Borrow material: Sub-soil material obtained from locations outside area to be graded, and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of work. This material shall be of residential/agricultural origin and shall meet or exceed the confined fill material criteria as per MOE "Fill Quality Guidelines for Lake Filling in Ontario" of June 1992.

Contractor shall provide Consultant with one chemical test per source prior to hauling material to the site. .4 Unsuitable materials: .1 Weak and compressible materials under excavated areas. .2 Frost susceptible materials under excavated areas. .3 Frost susceptible materials: .1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested to ASTM D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D422 and ASTM C136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1 .2 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20% by mass passing 0.075 mm Sieve. .5 Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of Portland cement, concrete aggregates and water that resists settlement when placed in utility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.

1.3

Samples .1 Inform Consultant prior to commencing work of proposed source of fill materials and provide access for sampling.

1.4

Protection of Existing Features .1 Existing buried utilities and structures: .1 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. .2 Prior to commencing excavation work, notify Consultant or authorities having jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Site

Section 02316 Page 2 October 24, 2011

Consultant or authorities having jurisdiction shall clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during work. .3 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful test excavations. .4 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered. Obtain direction of Consultant before moving or otherwise disturbing utilities or structures. .5 Record location of maintained, re-routed and abandoned underground lines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

Materials .1 Aggregates, General: to Section 02701 and OPSS 1010. .2 Granular Bases: to Section 02721 and OPSS 1010. .3 Fill concrete: .1 Minimum compressive strength at 28 days: 15 MPa. .2 Maximum slump at time and point of discharge: 100 mm. .4 Unshrinkable fill: .1 Maximum compression strength at 28 days: 0.4 Mpa. .2 Maximum cement content: 25 kg/m3 of concrete mix. .3 Slump at time and point of discharge: 150 to 200 mm. .4 Air content: 4 to 6% .5 Sand bedding: to Section 02701 and following requirements: .1 Natural sand consisting of hard, strong, durable particles, free from a coating of any injurious material and free from injurious amounts of other deleterious materials. .2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136-84a. Sieve sizes as shown: Sieve Designation % Passing 4.75 mm 100 2.36 mm 95-100 1.18 mm 60-100 0.600mm 35-80 0.300 mm 15 - 50 0.150 mm 2-15 0.075 mm 0-5 .5 Native Backfill: selected site material from excavation approved by Consultant for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 150 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other deleterious materials. .6 Borrow material: See Part 1 - General, Definitions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

Site Preparation

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Site

Section 02316 Page 3 October 24, 2011

.1 Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated. .2 Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface may break evenly and cleanly.

3.2

Stockpiling .1 Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by Consultant. Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation. .2 Protect fill materials from contamination.

3.3

Dewatering .1 Keep excavations free of water while work is in progress. .2 Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off. .3 Dispose of water in a manner not detrimental to public and private property, or any portion of work completed or under construction. .4 Continuously dewater the excavations to control surface runoff or perched water table seepage for concreting and other work to be carried out in the dry condition. .5 Submit for Consultant's review details of proposed dewatering methods, such as dikes or well points. .6 Disposal of discharge water shall conform with requirements of the City Sewer Use Bylaw. .7 Dewatering operations shall be in conformance with MOE Permit to Take Water requirements. Contractor is responsible for procurement of permits.

3.4

Excavation .1 Excavate to lines, grades, locations, elevations and dimensions as indicated or directed

by Consultant. .2 Remove excavated material and other obstructions encountered during excavation. .3 Excavation must not interfere with normal 45 deg. splay of bearing from bottom of any footing. .4 Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw. .5 For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by Consultant in writing, do not excavate more than 10m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave open more than 5 m at end of day's operation.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Site

Section 02316 Page 4 October 24, 2011

.6 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material in approved off-site location. .7 Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses. .8 Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter. .9 Notify consultant when bottom of excavation is reached. .10 Obtain Consultant approval of completed excavation. .11 Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom to extent and depth as directed by Consultant. .12 Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows: .1 Fill under bearing surfaces and footings with concrete specified for footings. .2 Fill under other areas with Granular 'B' material specified in Section 02721. .13 Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations. Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to density at least equal to undisturbed soil. Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Consultant.

3.5

Excavation, Hauling and Disposal of Non-hazardous Waste .1 The Owner will retain a soils consultant to monitor the excavation of the impacted soils to assess disposal options. .2 Excavated sub-grade materials having a hydrocarbon odour or excavated road base materials exceeding the Table B criteria of MOEE "Guidelines for use at Contaminated Sites in Ontario" (February, 1997), cannot be re-used on-site. Instead, it shall be disposed of at a municipal landfill site (i.e., sanitary landfill) licensed to accept such waste. Carriers disposing the waste shall be registered with the MOEE. .3 Disposal as lakefill is not permitted.

3.6

Bedding and Surround of Underground Services .1 Place and compact granular material for bedding and surround of underground services as indicated and as specified. .2 Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.

3.7

Backfilling .1 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until Consultant has inspected and approved installation. .2 Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Site

Section 02316 Page 5 October 24, 2011

.3 Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris. Unless otherwise specified, backfill to consist of approved native backfill. Refer to drawings for additional requirements. .4 Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer. .5 Backfill around installations. .1 Place bedding and surround material as specified elsewhere. .2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hr. after placing of concrete. .3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed work to equalize loading.

Difference not to exceed 0.3 m. .4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures: .1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand earth and compaction pressure and approval obtained from Consultant or; .2 If approved by Consultant, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by Consultant.

3.8

Inspection and Testing .1 Testing of materials and compaction will be carried out by testing laboratory designated

by Owner. Frequency of tests will be determined by Consultant. .2 Owner will pay costs for inspection and testing.

3.9

Restoration .1 Upon completion of work, remove waste materials and debris, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Consultant. .2 Clean and prepare new work areas as directed by Consultant. .3 Clean and reinstate areas affected by work as directed by Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Aggregates: General

Section 02701 Page 1 October 24, 2011

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 .1 1.2

General Instructions Read and be governed by Conditions of the Contract and Sections of Division 1.

References

.1

ASTM C 117-90, Test Method for Material Finer Than 0.075 mm Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

.2

ASTM C 131-89, Test method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

.3

ASTM C 136-92, Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

.4

ASTM D 698-91, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-1bf/ft3) (600 kN-mlm).

.5

CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series.

.6

CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.

1.3 .1

Delivery, Storage and Handling Store cement in weather tight bins or silos that provide protection from dampness and easy access for inspection and identification of each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

Materials

.1

Fine aggregates satisfying requirements of applicable section shall be one, or a blend of following: .1 natural sand .2 manufactured sand .3 screenings produced in crushing of quarried rock, boulders, gravel or slag.

.2

Course aggregates satisfying requirements of applicable section shall be one, or a blend of following: .1 crushed rock from an approved bedrock source. .2 gravel composed of naturally formed particles of stone from an approved source.

.3

Granular base material: 19 mm crusher run limestone, or Granular ‘A’.

.4

Granular sub-base material: 50 mm crusher run limestone, or Granular ‘B’.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Aggregates: General .5

Section 02701 Page 2 October 24, 2011

Crushed pit-run or screened stone, gravel or sand consisting of hard, durable, angular particles, free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

Sequence of Operation

.1

Place granular base after finished sub-base surface or subgrade is inspected and approved by Consultant.

.2

Placing .1 Construct granular base to depth and grade in areas indicated. .2 Ensure no frozen material is placed. .3 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow and ice. .4 Place material using methods which do not lead to segregation or degradation of aggregate. .5 Place material to full width in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. .6 Shape each layer to smooth contour and compact to specified density before succeeding layer is placed. .7 Remove and replace that portion of layer in which material becomes segregated during spreading.

.3

Compaction Equipment .1 Compaction equipment to be capable of obtaining required material densities. .2 Efficiency of equipment not specified to be proved at least as efficient as specified equipment at no extra cost and written approval must be received from Consultant before use. .3 Equipped with device that records hours of actual work, not motor running hours.

.4

Compacting in accordance with ASTM D 698 and ASTM D 1557. .1 Compaction of Road Pavement Base: Compact to density of not less than 100% SPMDD. .2 Compaction of Sidewalks Base: Compact to density of not less than 100% of SPMDD. .3 Shape and roll alternately to obtain smooth, even and uniformly compacted base. .4 Apply water as necessary during compacting to obtain specified density. .5 In areas not accessible to rolling equipment, compact to specified density with mechanical tampers approved by Consultant. .6 Correct surface irregularities by loosening and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.

3.2

Site Tolerances .1 Finished base surface to be within plus or minus 10 mm of established grade and cross section but not uniformly high or low.

3.3

Proof Rolling

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Aggregates: General

Section 02701 Page 3 October 24, 2011

.1

For proof rolling use roller of 45400 kg gross mass with four pneumatic tires each carrying 11350 kg and inflated to 620 kPa. Four tires arranged abreast with centre to centre spacing of 915 mm maximum.

.2

Consultant may authorize use of other acceptable proof rolling equipment.

.3

Proofroll top of base upon completion of fine grading and compaction.

.4

Make sufficient passes with proof roller to subject every point on surface to three separate passes of loaded tire.

.5

Where proof rolling reveals defective areas: .1 Remove base, sub-base and subgrade material to depth and extent directed by Consultant. .2 Backfill excavated subgrade with sub-base material and compact in accordance with Section 02316. .3 Replace sub-base material and compact in accordance with Sections 02316 and 02721. .4 Replace base material and compact in accordance with this Section.

3.4

Inspection and Testing

.1

Testing of materials and compaction will be carried out by testing laboratory designated

by Owner. Frequency of tests will be determined by Consultant.

.2

Owner will pay costs for inspection and testing.

3.5 .1

Protection Maintain finished base in condition conforming to this section until succeeding material is applied or until acceptance by Consultant.

END OF SECTION

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Concrete Formwork - Site

Section 02710 Page 1 October 24, 2011

PART 1 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; GENERAL 1.1

General Requirements

.1 1.2

Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

Reference Standards

.1 Do concrete formwork in accordance with CAN3-A23.1, except where specified otherwise. .2 Do falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1-1975, except where specified otherwise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

Materials .1 Formwork lumber: plywood and wood formwork materials to CAN3-A23.1. .2 Falsework materials: to CSA S269.1. .3 Form release agent: chemically active release agents containing compounds that react with free lime present in concrete to provide water insoluble soaps, preventing concrete from sticking to forms. .4 Form stripping agent: colourless mineral oil, free of kerosene, with viscosity between 70 to 110mm/s at 40/o.C, flash point minimum 150/o.C. .5 Form ties: removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25mm diameter in concrete surface. .6 Form liner: Waferboard: to CAN 3-0188.2, P1 grade, 6mm thick

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

Erection .1 Verify lines, levels and centres before proceeding with formwork and ensure dimensions agree with drawings. .2 Construct forms to produce finished concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated within tolerances required by CAN 3-A23.1. .3 Line forms or provide suitable forms to provide smooth (fair face) finish for the following surfaces with material only as approved by Project Manager. .1 Exposed vertical faces of curbs, stairs and fascias. .4 Construct falsework in accordance with CSA S269.1.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Concrete Formwork - Site .5 Align form joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to minimum.

Section 02710 Page 2 October 24, 2011

.6 Use 25mm chamfer strips on external corners of curbs and fascia panels where indicated on drawings. .7 Form chases,slots,openings,drips,recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated. .8 Clean form work in accordance with CAN3-A23.1 before placing concrete. .9 Leave formwork in place for a minimum period of one day after placing concrete. .10 Re-use of formwork and falsework subject to requirements of CAN3-A23.1. .11 Forms must be coated with a release agent before each use.

END OF SECTION

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Cast-In-Place Concrete - Site

Section 02730 Page 1 October 24, 2011

PART 1 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; GENERAL 1.1

General Requirements

.1 1.2

Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

Referenced Standards

.1 Do cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with CSA CAN3-A23.1 and supplements and testing in accordance with CSA CAN3-A23.2 and supplements, except where specified otherwise.

1.3

Quality Assurance .1 Submit proposed quality control procedures for Consultantâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s approval including, but not limited to, proposed methods of concrete protection during hot or cold weather conditions. .2 The Contractor must have a minimum of 5 years experience in concrete work. .3 All materials must conform to CAN3-A23.1, latest edition. A copy must be kept on-site at all times during construction. .4 Furnish the Consultant with a certificate prepared by the ready-mix concrete suppliers stating that all requirements regarding strength, slump, air entrainment, mix, materials and ratio have been met and maintained. .5 Prior to pouring concrete obtain the approval of the Consultant of all formwork, placement of reinforcing steel, consolidation of subgrade and placement and consolidation of granular base. .6 Ensure work complies with the Ontario Building Code and all pertinent local by-laws and regulations. These shall govern in case of conflict with the specifications. Obtain and pay for all necessary permits before starting work. .7 Consultant shall have authority to reject or call for improvements in workmanship where he considers that concrete work falls below acceptable standard. Contractor shall be given one day notice that all concreting shall cease unless such improvements are made.

1.4

Samples and Mock-Ups .1 Contractor to provide a sample mock-up for approval of all concrete work (paving, walls, steps) per the detail shown on the drawings. The mock-up will show the sizes and final installation relationships between the various adjacent materials, and the finishes as specified. .2 The approved mock-up shall establish the standard by which all work shall be assessed.

Work that fails to meet the standard set by the mock-up shall be replaced. .3 Mock-up shall not be incorporated into the work, and shall be protected for the duration of the contract.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Cast-In-Place Concrete - Site

Section 02730 Page 2 October 24, 2011

.4 Contractor to provide (3x) 1.0m x 2.0m panels for approval by Consultant prior to installation of sidewalks.

PART 2 - PRODUCT STANDARDS 2.1

Materials .1 Portland cements: to CSA CAN3-A5. .2 Water, fine aggregates, normal weight coarse aggregates: to CSA CAN3-A23.1. .3 Air entraining admixture: TO CSA CAN3-A266.2. .4 Chemical admixtures: to CSA CAN3-A266.2. .5 Pozzolanic mineral admixtures: to CSA CAN3-A23.5. .6 Non-shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents, of pouring consistency, capable of developing compressive strength of 50 MPa at 28 days. .7 Dry Pack: premixed or non-premixed composition of non-metallic aggregate, cement and sufficient water for the mixture to retain its shape when made into a ball by hand and capable of developing compression strength of 50 MPa at 28 days. .8 Premoulded joint fillers: .1 Bituminous impregnated fibreboard: to ASTM D1751. .9 Curing Blanket: UltraCure Sun, manufactured by McTech Group Inc., and distributed by Geroquip Inc., Laval, Quebec, tel: 450.978.0200.

2.2

Admixtures .1 Obtain approval of Consultant before using admixtures. .2 Use only compatible admixtures. .3 Use of calcium chloride not permitted.

2.3

Air Entraining .1 Comply with CSA CAN3-A23.1 for use of air entrainment.

2.4

Concretes Mixes .1 Proportion normal density concrete to CSA CAN3-A23.1. .2 Type of cement: Symbol 10.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Cast-In-Place Concrete - Site

Section 02730 Page 3 October 24, 2011

.3 All concrete subject to freeze/thaw cycles including perimeter foundation walls, shall be exposure Class C. All other interior concrete exposure Class D. .4 Maximum size of coarse aggregate 20 mm. .5 For maximum and minimum slumps see CSA CAN3-A23.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

General .1 Refer to Sections 02710 for Concrete Formwork, and Section 02720 for Concrete Reinforcement. .1 Obtain Consultant's review before placing concrete. .2 Place concrete in accordance with CSA CAN3-A23.1. .3 Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement. .4 Obtain Consultant's review of proposed method of protection of concrete during placing and curing in adverse weather prior to placing of concrete. .5 Maintain accurate record of poured concrete items to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken. .6 Use internal vibrators whenever practicable for consolidating concrete. .7 Set forms true to line and grade, join neatly and tightly, and stake securely to resist concrete pressure and impact from tampers without springing. All alignment and grade of formwork shall be correct within 3mm in a 3.0m span.

3.2

Installation .1 Ensure that subgrade of compacted fill conforms to elevations and sections before placing granular base material. .2 Place granular base to minimum 150mm (6”) compacted thickness and compacted to 98% Standard Proctor density to ASTM D698-00a. .3 Screed concrete to required levels, to tolerance of 12.7 mm (1/2”) in 3050mm (10’). .4 Provide saw cut control joints as indicated on Drawings. Incorrect saw cuts in concrete will result in the removal and re-installation of the concrete panel. If no control joints indicated, maximum spacing to be 1.6m o/c. .5 Provide expansion joints as shown on Drawings and between road curbs, planter curb and sidewalk as well as adjacent to all structures, buildings, columns, walls, light poles and existing hard surfaces. Incorrect expansion joints in concrete will result in the removal and re-installation of the concrete panel or curb/ wall Expansion joint filler to be recessed 5mm below finish grade of concrete unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

Expansion joints in walls to be caulked per detail drawings.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Cast-In-Place Concrete - Site

Section 02730 Page 4 October 24, 2011

.6 Locate keyed joints as shown on drawings and details. .7 While placing concrete, compact thoroughly and uniformly by approved means to ensure a dense homogeneous structure free of air pockets, and honeycombs and closely bonded with reinforcement. .8 No offsets will be allowed between adjacent sections of joint fillers and no plugs of concrete will be permitted anywhere within an expansion joint. .9 Use joint filler to separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces or structures.

3.3

Inserts .1 Set sleeves, ties, anchor bolts and other inserts, openings and sleeves, in concrete floors and walls, as required by other trades. Sleeves, openings, etc., not indicated on structural drawings must be approved by the Consultant. .2 No sleeves ducts, pipes or other openings shall pass through beams or piers, except where detailed on structural drawings or approved by the Consultant. .3 Check locations and sizes of sleeves, openings, etc., with architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings.

3.4

Defective Concrete .1 Remove and replace excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete as directed by the Consultant.

3.5

Joint Fillers .1 Locate and form isolation and expansion joints as indicated. Install joint filler. .2 Use 12 mm thick joint filler to separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces and extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 12 mm of finished slab surface unless indicated otherwise.

3.6

Finishing .1 Finish concrete in accordance with CSA CAN3-A23.1. .2 Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, finish all site concrete walls and curbs with medium sandblast finish; all concrete paving with medium broom finish. All to Consultants approval. .3 Sandblast finish shall expose a range of small and medium sized aggregates frequently and evenly throughout all finished concrete. Allow minimum of one weekâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s approval time between completion of sample and commencement of work. .4 Adhere to approved mock-up for all concrete finishes.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Cast-In-Place Concrete - Site

Section 02730 Page 5 October 24, 2011

.5 All sidewalk finishing to be completed prior to freeze-up. Fence off sidewalks to prevent use by pedestrians, at contractors expense. .6 Rub exposed sharp edges of concrete with carborundum to produce 3 mm radiused edges unless otherwise detailed. .7 Apply curing blanket to manufactureâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specifications. .8 For typical cast-in-place concrete paving. .1 Sawcut control joints; tooled radius on expansion joints; no margins .2 Tool edges prior to sandblast finish to remove margins. .3 Apply smooth wood float finish before final finish .9 For typical cast-in-place concrete walls / curbs: .1 Sawcut control joints; tooled radius on expansion joints; no margins .2 Apply smooth wood float finish before final finish 3.7

Field Quality Control .1 Concrete materials and methods of construction: to CSA-A23.1 and testing in accordance with CSA-A23.2-94 unless otherwise specified. .2 Inspection and testing of concrete and concrete materials will be carried out by a testing laboratory designated by the Consultant. .3 Testing laboratory will take three (3) test cylinders for each test. Submit test cylinders to designated laboratory. The frequency of the test will be in accordance with CSA CAN3A23.2.94. .4 Testing laboratory will take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting.

Cure cylinder on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. .5 Testing laboratory will make at least one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken. .6 Inspection and testing by Consultants will not augment or replace Contractor quality control nor relieve him of his contractual responsibilities. .7 Cost of inspection and testing shall be paid in accordance with Section 01000.

3.8

Review of Construction .1 Review of construction by the Consultant and inspection and testing by an independent Inspection and Testing Agency, is to ascertain general conformity with contract documents.

It does not relieve the Contractor of his contractual responsibilities. The review is based on representative samples of the work and does not relieve the Contractor from carrying out his own quality control and making the work inconformity with the drawings and specifications.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx Cast-In-Place Concrete - Site 3.4

Section 02730 Page 6 October 24, 2011

Clean-up .1 Clear away excess and waste materials and debris resulting from the work of this section. .2 As late as possible prior to turning the building over to the Owner, clean down concrete to remove surface discolorations, efflorescence and the like. Use a suitable cleaning agent which will not itself stain the surfaces or mar the texture through chemical reaction.

END OF SECTION

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx

Unit Paving

Section 02785 Page 1 October 24, 2011

PART 1 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; GENERAL 1.1

General Requirements

.1 1.2

Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

Description

.1 Work of this section consists of design, labour, materials, tools and equipment, to supply and install the following work as indicated, specified herein, and required for a complete and proper installation. .1 Unit pavers .2 Complete layout details for the installation of the above with supervision and checking, as required to ensure that the installation is correct.

1.3

Qualifications .1 Work shall be executed only by a company with proven experience in the design and manufacture of architectural precast concrete and having adequate finances, equipment, plant and skilled personnel to expeditiously detail, fabricate and install the work of this section as required by the Contract Documents. .2 Manufacturer shall be responsible for the design, connections and installation of the precast concrete units and shall direct the placing of items to be cast in concrete work. .3 Manufacturer shall be qualified in accordance with CSA A23.4-00/A251-00 Qualification Code for Manufacturers of Architectural and Structural Precast Concrete.

1.4

Quality Assurance .1 All unit paving work shall be carried out by an approved contractor having at least 5 years experience in the work similar to that specified here. .2 Before commencing work, visit site and become familiar with the specifications governing the work of others, particularly drainage, backfill, concrete, mechanical and electrical work. .3 Commencement of work will denote acceptance of sub-surfaces and conditions.

Subsequent failure of installed work of this section due to sub-surface defects will be rectified at no cost to the Owner.

1.5

Finish, Samples, and Mock-ups .1 Construct a 2.0M x 3.0M area of unit paving illustrating the various patterns as shown on the drawings. .2 No blotching, patchiness or shade difference will be accepted. .3 Submit 2 samples of each unit paver for approval by Consultant.

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx

1.6

Unit Paving

Section 02785 Page 2 October 24, 2011

Handling, Storage and Protection .1 Store unit pavers off the ground to prevent contamination, staining, or other defects. .2 Cover sand with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to weather. Weigh down covering to prevent removal by wind. .3 Store different types of aggregates separately.

1.7

Warranty .1 Provide standard CPCI Ontario Chapter warranty of 2 years for unit paving work in accordance with Section 01780.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

Unit Pavers .1 Precast pavers: __________________ Supply samples to Consultant for approval. .2 Granular Base for concrete unit pavers: Granular Base ‘A’ as per Section 02701. .3 Sand Setting Bed: Concrete Sand conforming to CSA A23.1. gradation for fine aggregate. .4 Joint Filler: _____________

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

Allowable Tolerances .1 Finish paving surfaces within 6mm of established elevations and 3mm of other surfaces at joints between other paving types, manholes and other features within paved areas; and within 3mm under a 3.0M long straightedge.

3.2

Site Conditions .1 Carry out work of this section only when surfaces are at least 2°C and the temperature is rising, or: .2 Carry out the work of this section involving mortar and grout only when temperature is at or above that recommended by manufacturer. .3 Suspend paving operations when temperature falls below specified minimum.

3.3

Excavation and Backfilling: .1 As per Section 02316.

3.4

Layout and Installation of Unit Paving .1 Install unit paving true to grade, in location, layout and pattern as indicated on detail

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx

Unit Paving

Section 02785 Page 3 October 24, 2011

drawings. .2 Stake layout of unit paving for Consultant to approve prior to commencing installation. .3 Ensure granular base and sand setting bed is dry (4-8% moisture content) prior to placement of unit pavers. .4 Place compacted Granular â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;Aâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; to thickness as indicated on detail drawings. .5 Place sand to compacted thickness as indicated on detail drawings. .6 Pavers are to be laid in pattern as detailed. All joints to be offset. Smaller pavers are to be used on tighter radii or where cutting is required. .7 Install pavers with tight butt joints. .8 Tamp down and level pavers with mechanical plate vibrator as recommended by the manufacturer until pavers are true to grade and free of movement. .9 Fill spaces between pavers by sweeping in sand joint filler. .10 Pass mechanical plate vibrator on sand cushion over surface course to achieve compaction of sand in joints. .11 Surface of finished pavement: free from depressions exceeding 3mm as measured with 3.0m straight edge. .12 Install edge restraint where pavers meet soft surfaces, per manufacturerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s specifications. .13 Where required, cut paving units accurately with a concrete saw. A guillotine shall not be used. Do not damage edges or exposed surfaces. Treat cut edges to match factory condition. .14 Chipped, blemished or defective units shall not be installed. .15 Ensure that all grade transition zones are made gently and smoothly. .16 Clean surfaces of unit paver and maintain free of abrasive and staining substances. .17 All work within 1 m of the laying face must be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the completion of each day.

3.5

Adjustment and Replacement .1 At time of final acceptance at Project completion, and again at termination of guarantee period, Work of this Section will be inspected by Consultant, and adjustments and replacements shall be made under Work of this Section. .2 The warranty period begins after receipt of written acceptance of work of this Section by the Consultant. .3 Adjustment and replacement work shall be performed as specified in this Section with materials of same size, variety and quality of material replaced. .4 Replacement work shall be done under an additional guarantee of the same length and

Silva Cell Utilty Servicing Test Installation Nashdene Yard du Toit Allsopp Hillier Project No.: xxxx

Unit Paving

Section 02785 Page 4 October 24, 2011

conditions as described in this Specification. It shall date from time of Consultantâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s approval of replacement work.

3.6

Clean-up .1 Remove, as work progresses, excess or foreign materials that would set on or become difficult to remove from finished surface. .2 At completion, clean exposed surfaces of precast units. Remove dirt and other extraneous matter. Do not use acidic cleaners.

END OF SECTION

INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVEMENTS Applicable to Standard, Textured & Heavy Duty Unit Pavers

1-800-UNILOCK

www.unilock.com

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

FOREWORD These outline specifications have been prepared for the general guidance of specifiers, engineers, contractor and superintendents associated with the construction of interlocking concrete pavements in any type of traffic applications. A qualified engineer must determine the suitability of the design, confirm site conditions and monitor the installation in more critical applications.

INTRODUCTION Unilock® pavers are manufactured in a variety of shapes, colors and textures for residential, commercial, municipal and industrial applications. They offer Engineers, Architects, Landscape Architects and Planners several engineered placing systems that are durable, economical and aesthetically attractive. The systems also lend themselves to a multitude of design applications.

Unilock® pavers are manufactured to tight dimensional tolerances. This, in combination with their interlocking capabilities, allows the surface to act as a total membrane with a high resistance to compressive loads and lateral forces. ® Advantages of Unilock pavers:

•

The design and performance advantages of Unilock® pavers over other surfaces are dramatically reflected in the wide range of colors, individual shapes, texture, and variety of installation patterns.

•

Unilock® pavers offer an economical alternative to other types of pavements when viewed in the long term where maintenance and replacement costs are considered.

In some cases, initial costs can be even lower.

•

Ability to tolerate some subgrade and/or aggregate base deflection while still maintaining pavement continuity and structural integrity.

•

Ease of access to underground services and utilities and subsequent replacement without visual or structural changes.

•

High compressive strength provides excellent surface durability.

•

Low water absorption rate helps to resist potential damage caused by fuel and oil leakage, salt scaling, and freeze-thaw cycles.

•

Superior skid resistance for both vehicular and pedestrian applications.

•

Simplicity of construction methods generally suited to unskilled labor, which can reduce installation costs.

•

Very low maintenance requirements.

•

Maximum efficiency is obtained when the pavers are installed mechanically.

Unilock Specifications

Page 2

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS FOR__________________________ SECTION 0278 INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS PART 1

GENERAL

1.1

SECTION INCLUDES

A.

Concrete pavers

B.

Bedding and joint sand.

C.

Aggregate Base

D.

Edge Restraints

1.2

RELATED SECTIONS

Note: These related sections refer to standard specifications available from the local municipality or highway agency or from major specification writing agencies such as the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA), the National Stone Association (NSA), the American Concrete Pavement Association (ACPA), the National Asphalt Producers Association (NAPA), the National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS), National Master Specifications (NMS), the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the Canadian Government Standards Board (CGSB), the Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS), etc.

A. Section: [ - ] - Curbs and Drains.

B. Section: [ - ] - Aggregate Base.

C. Section: [ - ] - Cement Treated Base.

D. Section: [ - ] - Asphalt Treated Base.

E. Section: [ - ] - Overlays of Asphalt and Concrete Pavements.

F. Section: [ - ] - Roofing Materials.

G. Section: [ - ] - Bitumen and Neoprene Setting Bed, Acrylic Fortified Mortar Setting Bed. H. Section: [ - ] - Geotextiles.

I. Section: [ - ] - Unshrinkable Fill 1.3

REFERENCES

Note: Street, industrial, port and airport pavement thicknesses should be designed in consultation with a qualified civil engineer, in accordance with established flexible pavement design procedures, LOCKPAVE software, and in accordance with Concrete Paver Industry Technical Bulletins. Sample construction detail drawings are available from UnilockÂŽ. This specification may require modification for pavements with non-stabilized aggregate bases, asphalt or cement stabilized bases, or asphalt and concrete bases.

Unilock Specifications

Page 3

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

A.

American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) (latest edition): 1. C 33 Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

2. C 136 Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate.

3. C 140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units.

4. C 144 Standard Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

5. C 936 Specifications for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units.

6. C 979 Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.

7. D 698 Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5 lb (24.4 N) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop.

8. D 1557 Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10-lb (44.5 N) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop.

9. D 2940 Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports.

Note: In order to determine the latest version of the listed specifications and standards, please consult the ASTM web page (www.astm.com) 1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least one year of experience in placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature or dollar cost.

B.

The Contractor shall conform to all local, state/provincial licensing and bonding requirements.

1.5

SUBMITTALS

A.

Shop or product drawings and product data shall be submitted.

B.

Full size samples of concrete paving units shall be submitted to indicate Color and shape selections. Color will be selected by Architect/Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner from Unilock's available colors.

C.

Sieve analyses for grading of bedding and joint sand shall be submitted.

D.

Test results shall be submitted from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit requirements to ASTM C 936 or other applicable requirements.

E.

The layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and project formed details shall be indicated.

Note: The pattern in which pavers are installed is very important in vehicular applications. Avoid patterns with long continuous lines; these may be subject to failure under vehicular traffic.

1.6

MOCK-UPS

A.

A 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2m x 2m) paver area shall be installed as described in Article 3.02.

B.

This area will be used to determine the amount that the pavers settle into

Unilock Specifications

Page 4

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

bedding sand after compaction, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), color(s), and texture of the project.

C.

This area shall be the standard from which the work will be judged.

1.7

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Concrete pavers shall be delivered to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped cubes capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. The pavers shall be unloaded at the job site in such a manner that no damage occurs to the product.

B.

Bedding and joint sand shall be covered with a secure waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal by wind.

C.

Delivery and paving schedules shall be coordinated in order to minimize interference with normal use of buildings adjacent to paving.

1.8

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A.

Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall.

B.

Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials.

C.

Do not install frozen sand.

PART 2

MATERIALS

2.1

CONCRETE PAVERS

A.

Supplied by: UnilockÂŽ Location (Address, Phone, Fax)

B.

Product name(s)/shape(s), color(s), overall dimensions, and thickness of the paver(s) specified as follows: Product name:

_______________

Product shape(s):

_______________

Product color(s),

_______________

Note: Concrete pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. These insure a minimum joint between each unit into which sand is placed. Spacer bars help prevent contact of the edges with adjacent pavers and subsequent chipping. They are highly recommended for mechanically installed pavers. Manually installed pavers may be installed with or without spacer bars.

C.

Pavers shall meet the minimum material and physical properties set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units.

Efflorescence shall not be a cause for rejection.

1. Average compressive strength 8000 psi (55MPa) with no individual unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa).

Unilock Specifications

Page 5

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested according to ASTM C 140.

3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles, when tested according to ASTM C 67, with no breakage greater than 1.0% loss in dry weight of any individual unit.

This test method shall be conducted not more than 12 months prior to delivery of units.

Note: Efflorescence is a whitish powder-like deposit that sometimes appears on concrete products. Calcium hydroxide and other water-soluble materials form or are present during the hydration of Portland cement. Pore water becomes saturated with these materials, and diffuses to the surface of the concrete. When this water evaporates, the soluble materials remain as a whitish deposit on the concrete surface. The calcium hydroxide is converted to calcium carbonate during a reaction with carbon dioxide from the atmosphere. The calcium carbonate is difficult to remove with water. However, the efflorescence will wear off with time, and it is advisable to wait a few months before attempting to remove any efflorescence. Commercially available cleaners can be used, provided directions are carefully followed. Some cleaners contain acids that may alter the color of the pavers.

D.

Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. ACI Report No. 212.3R provides guidance on the use of pigments.

2.2

GRANULAR SUBBASE The granular subbase material shall consist of granular material graded in accordance with ASTM D 2940, as presented in Table 1.

TABLE 1 SUBBASE MATERIAL GRADING REQUIREMENTS ASTM D 2940 Sieve Size

Percentages Passing

2 in. (50 mm)

100

1½ in. (37.5 mm)

90 to 100

¾ in. (19 mm) 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) No. 4 (4.75 mm)

30 to 60

No. 30 (600 µm) No. 200 (75 µm)

0 to 12 *

* In order to prevent damage by frost heaving, it may be necessary to limit the percentages of material passing the No. 200 sieve to less than shown in the tables.

Unilock Specifications

Page 6

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

2.3

GRANULAR BASE The granular base material shall be graded in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 2940, as presented in Table 2 TABLE 2 BASE MATERIAL GRADING REQUIREMENTS ASTM D 2940 Sieve Size 2 in. (50 mm)

Percentages Passing 100

1½ in. (37.5 mm)

95 to 100

¾ in. (19 mm)

70 to 92

3/8 in. (9.5 mm)

50 to 70

No. 4 (4.75 mm)

35 to 55

No. 30 (600 µm)

12 to 25

No. 200 (75 µm)

0 to 8 *

* In order to prevent damage by frost heaving, it may be necessary to limit the percentages of material passing the No. 200 sieve to less than shown in the tables.

2.4

BEDDING AND JOINT SAND

A.

The bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, and free from deleterious or foreign matter. It can be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Do not use limestone screenings or stone dust that do not conform to the grading requirements in Table 3. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall be as hard as practically available.

Note: The type of sand used for bedding is often called concrete sand. Sands vary regionally. Screenings and stone dust can be unevenly graded and have material passing the No. 200 (75μm) sieve. Bedding sands with these characteristics should not be used. Contact local paver contractors or manufacturers to the project and confirm sand(s) successfully used in previous similar applications.

Note: If the hardness of the bedding sand is not sufficient or questionable for the application (usually a heavily trafficked thoroughfare), contact Unilock® (1-800UNILOCK) for information and specifications on assessing bedding sand durability under heavy traffic loads.

B.

The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as shown in Table 3.

Unilock Specifications

Page 7

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

TABLE 3 BEDDING SAND GRADING REQUIREMENTS ASTM C 33 Sieve Size 3/8 in. (9.5 mm)

Percent Passing 100

No. 4 (4.75 mm)

95 to 100

No. 8 (2.36 mm)

85 to 100

No. 16 (1.18 mm)

50 to 85

No. 30 (600 µm)

25 to 60

No. 50 (300 µm)

10 to 30

No. 100 (150 µm)

2 to 10

Note: Bedding sand may be used for joint sand. However, extra effort in sweeping and compacting the pavers may be required in order to fill the joints completely. It is recommendable to use sand specially gradated for joints. The gradations shown in Table 4 are recommended. Joint sand should never be used for bedding sand.

C.

The joint sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown in Table 4 below: TABLE 4 JOINT SAND GRADING REQUIREMENTS ASTM C 144

2.5

Natural Sand

Manufactured Sand

Sieve Size

Percent Passing

Percent Passing

No. 4 (4.75 mm)

100

100

No. 8 (2.36 mm)

95 - 100

95 to 100

No. 16 (1.18 mm)

70 - 100

70 to 100

No. 30 (600 µm)

40 - 75

40 to 75

No. 50 (300 µm)

10 - 35

20 to 40

No. 100 (150 µm)

2 - 15

10 to 25

No. 200 (75 µm)

0

0 to 10

EDGE RESTRAINTS The provision of suitable edge restraints is critical to the satisfactory performance of interlocking concrete block pavement. The pavers must abut tightly against the restraints to prevent rotation under load and any consequent spreading of joints. The restraints must be sufficiently stable that, in addition to providing suitable edge support for the paver units, they are able to withstand the impact of temperature changes, vehicular traffic and/or snow removal equipment.

Unilock Specifications

Page 8

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

Curbs, gutters or curbed gutter, constructed to the dimensions of municipal standards (noting that these standards generally refer to cast-in-place concrete sections), are considered to be acceptable edge restraints for heavy duty installations. Where extremely heavy industrial equipment is involved such as container handling equipment, the flexural strength of the edge restraint should be carefully reviewed, particularly if a section that is flush with the surface is used and may be subjected to high point loading.

Edge restraints shall be used along all unrestrained paver edges and supported on a minimum of 6 in. (150mm) of aggregate base.

PART 3

EXECUTIONS

3.1

EXAMINATION

A.

Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the specifications.

Note: For installation on a compacted aggregate base and soil subgrade, the specifier should be aware that the top surface of the pavers may be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above the final elevation after compaction. This difference in initial and final elevation is to compensate for possible minor settling.

Note: Compaction of the soil subgrade to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density per ASTM D 698 is recommended. Higher density or compaction to ASTM D 1557 (Modified Proctor Density) may be necessary for areas subject to vehicular traffic. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base material may be necessary with weak or saturated subgrade soils. The Architect/Engineer should inspect subgrade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications.

B.

Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to specifications and drawings.

C.

Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances and elevations conform to the specifications.

Note: Local aggregate base materials typical to those used for flexible pavements are recommended, or those conforming to ASTM D 2940. Compaction to not less than 95% Proctor Density in accordance with ASTM D 698 is recommended for pedestrian areas. Compaction to not less than 98% Modified Proctor Density according to ASTM D 1557 is recommended for vehicular areas.

Note: The aggregate base should be spread and compacted in uniform layers not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) thickness. Recommended base surface tolerance should be plus or minus 3/8 in. (10 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) straight edge. The Architect/Engineer should inspect geotextile materials and placement (if applicable), base preparation, surface tolerances, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance to specifications.

Note: Mechanical tampers (jumping jacks) are recommended for compaction of soil subgrade and aggregate base around lamp standards, utility structures, building Unilock Specifications

Page 9

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

edges, curbs, tree wells and other protrusions. Areas not accessible to roller compaction equipment should be compacted to the specified density with mechanical tampers. CAUTION - Care shall be taken around the perimeters of excavations, buildings, curbs, etc. These areas are especially prone to consolidation and settlement. Wedges of backfill should not be placed in these areas. If possible, backfilling and compacting in these areas particularly should proceed in shallow lifts, parallel to the finished surface.

D.

Verify the proper installation of the concrete curbing, in terms of location, elevation, and adherence to the specifications.

E.

Verify that the base is dry, uniform, even and ready to support sand, pavers and imposed loads.

F.

Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation shall signify acceptance of base and edge restraints.

3.2

SITE PREPARATION

A.

The site must be stripped of all topsoil and other objectionable materials to the grades specified.

B.

All subdrainage of underground services within the pavement area must be completed in conjunction with subgrade preparation, and before the commencement of subbase construction.

Note: All service trenches within the pavement area must be back filled to the subgrade level with approved material placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 4 in. (200 mm) loose thickness. Each lift must be compacted to at least 100 percent Standard Proctor Density as specified in ASTM D 698.

C.

After trimming to the grades specified, the pavement is to be proof rolled to 100 percent Standard Proctor Density in the presence of the Consultant, with soft spots or localized pockets of objectionable material excavated and properly replaced with approved granular material.

D.

The subgrade shall be trimmed to within 0 to ½ in. (0 to 10mm) of the specified grades. The surface of the prepared subgrade shall not deviate by more than 3/8 in. (10mm) from the bottom edge of a 39 in. (1m) straight edge laid in any direction.

E.

The Contractor shall ensure that the prepared subgrade is protected from damage from inundation by surface water. No traffic shall be allowed to cross the prepared subgrade. Repair of any damage resulting shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be repaired.

F.

Under no circumstances shall further pavement construction proceed until the subgrade has been inspected by the Owner or the Consultant.

3.3

GRANULAR SUBBASE AND BASE INSTALLATION

A.

The subbase shall be placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 6 in., (150 mm) loose thickness and compacted to at least 100 percent Standard Proctor Density as per ASTM D 698.

Unilock Specifications

Page 10

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

Subbase thickness shall be _____in.(____mm).

B.

After proper construction of the edge restraints for the interlocking concrete pavement as per Section 3.4, and upon approval by the Consultant, aggregate base shall be placed in uniform lifts not exceeding 6 in. (150 mm) loose thickness. Each lift shall be compacted to at least 100 percent Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density.

Base thickness shall be _____in. (____mm).

C.

The granular base shall be trimmed to within 0 to 3/8 in. (0 to 10 mm) of the specified grade. The surface of the prepared base shall not deviate by more than 3/8 in. (10 mm) from the bottom edge of a 10 ft. (3 m) long straight edge laid in any direction.

D.

The upper surface of the base shall be sufficiently well graded and compacted to prevent infiltration of the bedding sand into the base both during construction and throughout its service life. Segregated areas of the granular base shall be blended by the application of crushed fines that have been watered and compacted into the surface.

E.

Before commencing the placing of the sand bedding course and the placement of the interlocking concrete pavers, the base shall be inspected by the Owner or the Consultant.

3.4

EDGE RESTRAINTS

A.

Adequate edge restraint shall be provided along the perimeter of all paving as specified. The face of the edge restraint, where it abuts pavers, shall be vertical down to the subbase.

B.

All concrete edge restraints shall be constructed to dimensions and level specified and shall be supported on a compacted subbase not less than 6 in (150 mm) thick.

C.

Concrete used for the construction of edge restraints shall be air-entrained and have a compressive strength as specified. All concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 94 requirements.

3.5

PAVER INSTALLATION

A.

Spread the bedding sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) thickness, not exceeding 1 ½ in. (40 mm) thickness. The screeded sand should not be disturbed. Sufficient sand shall be placed in order to stay ahead of the laid pavers. Do not use the bedding sand to fill depressions in the base surface.

Note: The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose condition, and protected against incidental compaction, both prior to and following screeding.

Any incidentally compacted sand or screeded sand left overnight, shall be loosened before further paving units are placed. Sand shall be lightly screeded in a loose condition to the predetermined depth, only slightly ahead of the paving units. Under no circumstances shall the sand be screeded in advance of the laying face to an extent to which paving will not be complete on that day.

Unilock Specifications

Page 11

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

Screed sand shall be fully protected against incidental compaction, including compaction by rain. Any screeded sand which is incidentally compacted prior to laying of the paving unit, shall be removed and brought back to profile in a loose condition. Neither pedestrian nor vehicular traffic shall be permitted on the screeded sand.

The Contractor shall screed the bedding sand using either an approved mechanical spreader (e.g.: an asphalt paver) or by the use of screed rails and boards.

B.

Initiation of paver placement shall be deemed to represent acceptance of the pavers.

C.

Pavers shall be free of foreign material before installation.

D.

Pavers shall be inspected for color distribution and all chipped, damaged or discolored pavers shall be replaced.

Note: Color Blending - Paving units shall be installed from a minimum of 3 bundles simultaneously drawing the paver vertically rather than horizontally. (Color variation occurs with all concrete products. This phenomenon is influenced by a variety of factors, e.g. moisture content, curing conditions, different aggregates and, most commonly, from different production runs.) By installing from a minimum of three bundles simultaneously, variation in color is dispersed and blended throughout the project.

E.

The pavers shall be laid in the pattern(s) as shown on the drawings. String lines or chalk lines on bedding sand should be used to hold all pattern lines true.

F.

Joints between the pavers on average shall be between 1/16 in. and 1/8 in. (2 mm to 4 mm) wide. In order to maintain the desired pattern, joint spacing must be consistent. This spacing must also be provided for the first row abutting the edge restraint.

Note: Installing pavers too tightly may lead to chipping at the edges.

G.

Gaps at the edges of the paved area shall be filled with cut pavers.

Note: Units cut no smaller than one-third of a whole paver are recommended along edges subject to vehicular traffic.

H.

Pavers to be placed along the edge shall be cut with a double blade paver splitter or masonry saw.

Note: The use of infill concrete or discontinuities in patterns will not be permitted except along the outer pavement boundaries, adjacent to drains and manholes.

I.

Upon completion of cutting, the area must be swept clean of all debris to facilitate inspection and to ensure pavers are not damaged during compaction.

(Debris or sand particles left on pavers which are being compacted can cause point loading which may chip, scrape or break the paver.)

J.

After sweeping and prior to compaction, the paved area must be inspected by the owner or consultant to ensure satisfactory color blending. Pavers can be moved easily at this time to achieve good color distribution.

Unilock Specifications

Page 12

Installation Specifications for Interlocking Concrete Pavements

K.

Low amplitude, high frequency plate compactor shall be used to compact the pavers into the sand. The compactor shall transmit an effective force not less 2 than 75 kN per square metre (1600 Lb/ft ) of plate area. The frequency of vibration shall be within the range of 75 to 100 Hz. Use Table 5 below to select size of compaction equipment: TABLE 5 PAVER THICKNESS AND REQUIRED MINIMUM COMPACTION FORCE Paver Thickness Compaction Force 2 3/8 in. (60 mm) 3000 lbs [13 kN] 2 3/4 in. (70 mm) & 5000 lbs [22 kN] 3 1/8 in. (80 mm)

Note: Use of a urethane plate compactor pad is recommended to minimize any scuffing of the paving stone surface.

L.

The pavers shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand bedding and brought to level and profile by not less than three passes. Initial compaction should proceed as closely as possible following the installation of the paving units and prior to the acceptance of any traffic or application of sweeping sand.

M.

Any units that are structurally damaged during compaction shall be immediately removed and replaced.

N.

Dry joint sand shall be swept into the joints until the joints are full. This will require at least two or three passes with the compactor. Do not compact within 3 ft. (1 m) of the unrestrained edges of the paving units.

O.

All work to within 3 ft. (1 m) of the laying face must be left fully compacted with sand-filled joints at the completion of each day.

P.

Excess joint sand shall be swept off when the job is complete.

3.06

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A.

Final elevations shall be checked for conformance to the drawings after removal of excess joint sand.

B.

All surface and pavement structures shall be true to the lines and levels, grades, thickness and cross sections shown on the drawings. All pavements shall be finished to lines and levels to ensure positive drainage at all drainage outlets and channels. In no case shall the cross-fall of any portion of pavement be less than 2 percent. The final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 in. (10 mm) under a 10 ft. (3 m) long straight edge.

C.

The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels.

END OF SECTION Unilock Specifications

Page 13

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS

PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS This specification defines material and performance requirements for soils which are to be used within the Silva Cell system. The SPECIFICATION EDITOR must select the type of soil appropriate to each particular application, reflecting local market availability and specific application requirements such as soil type, pH, and drainage characteristics for the project. The SPECIFICATION EDITOR is responsible for selecting from the following soil types (see specification for requirements of each): 2.1 TOPSOIL, IMPORTED OR HARVESTED (for use as a component of planting soil mix): Imported topsoil meeting specific requirements for organic matter, cleanliness, pH, and source location.

2.2 EXISTING SITE SOIL (for use as a component of planting soil mix): Existing site soil meeting specific requirements.

2.5 PLANTING SOIL – EXISTING SOIL MIX: Planting mix of existing site soil and compost.

2.6 PLANTING SOIL - SILVA CELL STANDARD SOIL MIX: Planting mix of topsoil, compost, and course sand.

2.7 PLANTING SOIL – SILVA CELL BIORETENTION SOIL MIX (for stormwater applications): Planting mix of compost and coarse sand mixed to achieve specific water permeability.

NOTE: This specification may be modified to accept municipally-approved bioretention soil mixes and related specifications.

Some elements in these specifications require coordination with project drawings. These items are noted “as indicated on plans or drawings.”

See the DeepRoot website (www.deeproot.com) for questions. DeepRoot can assist in evaluating and sizing project-specific design elements for Silva Cells stormwater applications.

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-1-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

1.2

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY

A.

Section Includes: 1.

B.

Related Sections: 1.

1.3

Furnishing and installation of Planting Soil within the Silva Cell system.

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements a.

Section 32 94 50 Silva Cells b.

Section 32 94 53 Root Barrier

DEFINITIONS A.

Planting Soil: Soil, of a variety of textures, defined in this section, intended to fill the Silva Cell frames and other planting spaces to support the growth of trees and other plants.

B.

Silva Cells: Plastic structural cellular system with post, beams and decks designed to be filled with planting soil for tree rooting and/or used for water storage and support vehicle loaded pavements.

C.

Soil Peds: Clumps of soil that naturally aggregate during the soil building process.

Creating a soil mix shall be done in a way that maintains the soil peds. Refrain from over-mixing.

D.

Tree: A perennial woody plant with one or several trunks and a distinct crown and intended to become large enough to shade people and or vehicles.

1.4

SUBMITTALS A.

Upon forty-five (45) days prior to start of installation of items in this section, the Contractor shall provide submittals required in this section to the landscape architect for review and approval.

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-2-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS B.

Product Data: For each type of product, submit manufacture's product literature with technical data sufficient to demonstrate that the product meets the requirements of the specification.

C.

Material Certificates: Submit material certificates for all natural and bulk material indicating that the material meets the requirements of the specification.

D.

Soil test analysis: Submit soil testing results from an approved soil-testing laboratory for each soil and soil mix for approval.

1. All testing will be at the expense of the Contractor. The landscape architect may request additional planting mix tests on different mix component ratios in order to attain results that more closely meet the mix requirements.

2. The testing laboratory shall be a member of the Soil Science Society of America's, North American Proficiency Testing Program (NAPT), and have a minimum of five years experience with the test protocols of the United States Golf Association Green Section.

3. All testing shall comply with the requirements of the Methods of Soil Analysis Part 1 and 3, published by the Soil Science Society of America.

4. Soil testing shall be as required for each product an as defined below: a. Physical analysis.

1. Particle size analysis shall be provided for gravel, clay, silt, and sand fractions 2. USDA soil texture 3. Fines Modulus Index for each sand source 4. Infiltration testing shall be done at 80 to 85% compaction at proctor density using ASTM D 698-91. Test Results shall include bulk density b. Chemical analysis. Note that nutrient levels and chemical analysis shall include recommendations from the testing laboratory for ranges of each element appropriate for the types of plants to be grown in the soil mix.

1. Nutrient levels by parts per million including phosphorus, potassium, calcium, magnesium, manganese, iron, copper, zinc and calcium 2. Percent organic content 3. pH 4. Soluable salt by electrical conductivity 5. Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC)

E.

Samples for Verification: Submit two gallon samples of each product and material where required by the specification to the landscape architect for approval. Label samples to indicate product, source location, specification number, characteristics, and locations in the Work. Samples will be reviewed for appearance only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the contractor. Delivered materials shall closely match the samples.

32 94 56 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Planting Soil for Silva Cells Š 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-3-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS 1.

1.5

Planting soil shall be labeled as to the percentage of each component in the mix.

SOIL INSTALLATION MOCK UP AND COMPACTION EVALUATION A.

Prior to the installation of planting soil within the Silva Cells, construct a mock up of the complete installation at the site. The installation of the mock up shall be in the presence of the landscape architect.

B.

The Silva Cell mock up shall be as outlined in Specification Section 32 94 30 Silva Cells.

1.6

SCHEDULING A.

General: Prior to the start of Work, prepare a detailed schedule of the work for coordination with other trades.

B.

Schedule all utility installations prior to beginning work in this section.

C.

Where possible, schedule the installation of planting soil within the Silva Cells immediately after the installation of the Silva Cell frames. Protect installed Silva Cells from damage in the event that work must occur over or adjacent to the completed Silva Cells.

1.7

QUALITY ASSURANCE A.

1.8

Installer Qualifications: Soil within the Silva Cells shall be installed by the same contractor who is installing the Silva cells. See Specification Section 32 94 50 Silva Cells for installer qualifications.

PERMITS AND CODE COMPLIANCE

A.

1.9

Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary permits/approvals from all such authorities.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, if applicable. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while on the project site.

B.

Bulk Materials: Do not deliver or place backfill, soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

32 94 56 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Planting Soil for Silva Cells Š 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-4-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS 1. Bulk materials shall be stored and staged in a location approved by landscape architect or as indicated on the plans and in a manner that prevents damage to the site or the stored materials.

2. Provide protection including tarps, plastic and or matting between all bulk materials and any finished surfaces sufficient to protect the finish material.

C.

Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, and walkways. Provide additional sediment control to retain excavated material, backfill, soil amendments and planting mix within the project limits as needed.

D.

Protect Silva Cells from damage during installation of planting soil.

1.10

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

During the installation of Planting Soil within the Silva cells comply with all project conditions in Specification Section 32 94 50 Silva Cells

B.

Weather Limitations: Do not proceed with work when subgrades, soils and planting soils are in a wet, muddy or frozen condition.

1.11 A.

1.12 A.

PROJECT WORK Coordinate installation with all other work that may impact the completion of the Silva Cell installation.

PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING Prior to the start of the installation of Planting Soil within the Silva Cells, meet at the site with the landscape architect, general contractor and the Silva Cell installer to review installation layout, procedures, means and methods.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOTE TO SPECIFICATION EDITOR: select one or more of the following planting soil components (topsoil, compost, and/or sand) to meet project requirements. Local soil types may require modification to this specification.

2.1

TOPSOIL, IMPORTED OR HARVESTED (FOR USE AS A COMPONENT OF PLANTING SOIL MIX)

32 94 56 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Planting Soil for Silva Cells Š 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-5-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS A.

Fertile, friable, loamy soil, free from subsoil, refuse, roots, heavy or stiff clay, stones larger than 1 inch, contaminants, noxious seeds, sticks, brush, litter, and other deleterious substances; suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth. Soil source location and extent of area suitable for harvest shall be approved by the landscape architect and shall comply with all local regulations governing the removal of topsoil.

B.

Topsoil texture shall be loam, sandy loam to sandy clay loam, suitable for the germination of seeds and the support of vegetative growth, which is a naturally produced soil.

C.

Physical Requirements for Topsoil Parameter  Gravel > 2mm  Silt .002-.05 mm &  Clay < .002mm

Units % Dry Weight % Dry Weight % Dry Weight

Acceptable Range Less than 10% 15-30% 20-35%

D.

Chemical Requirements for Topsoil Parameter  Organic Matter  pH  Soluble Salt*  Cation Exchange Capacity  Nutrient Analysis

Units % Dry Weight pH Units mmhos/cm or dS/m meQ/100g PPM

Acceptable Range 2-8% 5.0 to 7.5 3.5 or less >8 As required for the plants specified

* by electrical conductivity of a 1:1 soil water sample at 25 degrees E.

Submit soil testing results for approval by the Landscape Architect, as defined in Section 1, that the material meets the above physical and chemical requirements.

F.

Submit two gallon sample for verification and approval by the Landscape Architect.

2.2

EXISTING SITE SOIL (FOR USE AS A COMPONENT OF PLANTING SOIL MIX)

A.

Existing site soils shall be used only after excavated and approved by the project Landscape Architect.

B.

Existing site soil that is clean, coarse grained fill soil meeting the requirements of the Unified Soil Classification system for soil type GW, GP, GC with less than 40% fines, SW, and SC with less than 40% fines. Soil shall be sufficiently friable to be mixed with the required compost and installed into the Silva Cell system.

C.

Existing site soil shall be free of, trash and other debris. It shall be free of stones, stumps, roots, or other similar objects larger than three inches, and shall be free of toxic material injurious to plant growth.

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-6-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS D.

Physical Requirements for Existing Site Soil Parameter Units  Gravel > 2mm % Dry Weight  Silt .002-.05 mm & Clay < .002mm % Dry Weight

E.

Chemical Requirements for Existing Site Soil Parameter Units  Organic Matter % Dry Weight  pH pH Units  Soluble Salt* mmhos/cm or dS/m  Cation Exchange Capacity meQ/100g  Nutrient Analysis PPM

Acceptable Range Less than 10% Combined 20-40% Acceptable Range 0.05-8% 5.0 to 7.5 4 or less >5 As required for the plants specified

* by electrical conductivity of a 1:1 soil water sample at 25 degrees F.

Submit soil testing results for approval by the Landscape Architect, as defined in Section 1, that the material meets the above physical and chemical requirements.

G.

Submit product data, material certificates, and results of soil test analysis showing that these requirements have been met, for approval by the Landscape Architect.

H.

Submit two gallon sample for verification and approval by the Landscape Architect.

2.3

COMPOST (FOR USE AS A COMPONENT OF PLANTING SOIL MIX) A.

Compost shall meet the requirements of the US Composting Council “Landscape Architecture/Design Specifications for Compost Use”, section “Compost as a Landscape Backfill Mix Component”, with the following additional requirements: 1.

B.

Compost feedstock shall be yard waste trimmings and/or source-separated municipal solid waste to produce a fungi-dominated compost. Compost shall not be derived from biosolids or industrial residuals.

Compost testing and analysis: Compost analysis shall be provided by the Compost supplier. Before delivery of the Compost, the supplier must provide the following documentation: 1.

A statement that the Compost meets federal and state health and safety regulations.

2.

Compost testing methodologies and sampling procedures shall be as provided in Test methods for the Examination of Composting and Compost (TMECC), as published by the US Composting Council.

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-7-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS C.

Submit supplier’s literature and material certification that includes physical analysis and chemical analysis of the compost.

D.

Submit two gallon sample for approval by the Landscape Architect.

2.4 A.

SAND (FOR USE AS A COMPONENT OF PLANTING SOIL MIX) Coarse concrete sand, ASTM C-33 Fine Aggregate, with a Fines Modulus Index of 2.8 and 3.2.

1. Sands shall be clean, sharp, natural sands free of limestone, shale and slate particles.

2. Sand PH shall be lower than 7.0 3. Provide the following particle size distribution: Sieve  3/8" (9.5mm)  No 4 (4.75mm)  No 8 (2.36mm)  No 16(1.18mm)  No30 (.60mm)  No50 (.30mm)  No100 (.15mm)

B.

2.5 A.

Percent Passing 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 25-60 10-30 2-10

Submit manufacturer’s testing data for approval that the material complies with the above requirements.

PLANTING SOIL – EXISTING SOIL MIX Planting Mix of existing site soil and compost mixed to the following proportion: Material  Existing site soil  Compost

% by volume 80% 20%

B.

Do not screen or over mix to maintain soil peds. Soil peds or clumps up to 4 inches in diameter are acceptable in the soil mix.

C.

Make chemical modifications to the soil mix as indicated by soil tests for the types of plants to be grown.

D.

Once mixing is complete, cover stock piles with tarps or heavy plastic to protect soil from drying, saturation and erosion.

E.

Submit two gallon sample for approval by the Landscape Architect.

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-8-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS 2.6 A.

PLANTING SOIL - SILVA CELL STANDARD SOIL MIX Planting Mix of topsoil, compost, and course sand mixed to the following proportion: Material  Compost  Coarse Sand  Topsoil (for use as a base in a planting soil mix)

% by volume 12-17% 35-50% 35-50%

B.

Adjust the ratio of the components to achieve infiltration rates between 0.75 and 1.75 inches per hour when compacted to 80-85% of maximum dry density. Submit multiple mix ratios for infiltration rates to establish the correct mix ratio for the available topsoil.

C.

Do not screen or over mix to maintain soil peds. Soil peds or clumps up to 4 inches in diameter are acceptable in the soil mix.

D.

Submit testing results for infiltration rates at 80-85% compaction for approval by the Landscape Architect.

E.

Submit two gallon sample for approval by the Landscape Architect.

2.7

PLANTING SOIL - SILVA CELL BIORETENTION SOIL MIX (for stormwater applications)

NOTE TO SPECIFICATION EDITOR: Bioretention soils are used for stormwater or water harvesting applications for filtration of water contaminants. Tree species selected for planting in this soil mix should be compatible with the expected hydrologic extremes within such a system.

A.

Planting mix of compost and coarse sand mixed to the following proportion.

Material  Coarse Sand  Compost

% by volume 80% 20%

B.

Infiltration rates shall be a minimum 4 inches per hour, when compacted to 80-85% of maximum dry density.

C.

Planting mix shall be thoroughly mixed prior to installation.

D.

Submit testing results for infiltration rates at 80-85% compaction for approval by the Landscape Architect.

E.

Submit two gallon sample for approval by the Landscape Architect.

2.8

PLANTING SOIL – MUNICIPALLY APPROVED BIORETENTION SOIL MIX (FOR STORMWATER APPLICATIONS)

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-9-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS A.

There is a growing list of municipalities and other governing agencies that have custom bioretention soil mixes. The following have been approved for substitution in the Silva Cell system. Municipally Approved Bioretention Soil shall comply with all local requirements and the submittal requirements of these specifications for Bioretention Soil.

1. Washington State Department of Ecology a. Planting soil shall meet the most current requirements as outlined in Volume III-Hydrologic Analysis and Flow Control BMPs, Appendix III-C, Washington State Department of Ecology Low Impact Development Design and Flow Modeling Guidance, Section 7.7.1.

2. City of Seattle a. Planting soil shall meet the requirements of the most current requirements as outlined in the City of Seattle Bioretention Soil Specification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

Install planting soil in Silva Cells and mulch as described in Section 32 95 40 Silva Cells.

END OF SECTION

32 94 56 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; Planting Soil for Silva Cells Š 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-10-

SECTION 32 94 56 PLANTING SOIL for SILVA CELLS Submittal Checklist for Reference Only Contractor shall provide submittals required to the landscape architect for review and approval.

The Submittal process may take up to two months prior to installation of the Silva Cell system and should be executed as soon as possible after the contract is awarded. All testing will be at the expense of the Contractor.

SOIL COMPONENT SUBMITTALS – PRIOR TO PLANTING SOIL MIXING 2.1 TOPSOIL - IMPORTED OR HARVESTED (for use as a component of planting soil mix) Suppliers literature and material certification that includes physical analysis and chemical analysis with recommendations for amendments Two gallon sample 2.2 EXISTING SITE SOIL (for use as a component of planting soil mix) Suppliers literature and material certification that includes physical analysis and chemical analysis with recommendations for amendments Two gallon sample 2.3 COMPOST (for use as a component of planting soil mix) Certificate of compliance with federal and state health and safety regulations Lab analysis for physical, organic and chemical requirements, and feed stock percentage Two gallon sample 2.4 SAND (for use as a component of planting soil mix) Suppliers literature and material certification that includes physical analysis, fines modulus index and chemical analysis with recommendations for amendments Two gallon sample SOIL MIX SUBMITTALS – FOR FINAL APPROVAL BY LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT 2.5 PLANTING SOIL – EXISTING SITE SOIL MIX Two gallon sample, labeled with the percentage of each soil component in the mix 2.6 PLANTING SOIL - SILVA CELL STANDARD SOIL MIX Testing results for infiltration rates at 80 and 85% of maximum dry density Two gallon sample, labeled with the percentage of each soil component in the mix 2.7 PLANTING SOIL - SILVA CELL BIORETENTION SOIL MIX (for stormwater applications) Testing results for infiltration rates at 80 and 85% of maximum dry density Two gallon sample, labeled with the percentage of each soil component in the mix

32 94 56 – Planting Soil for Silva Cells © 2010 Deep Root Partners, L.P. Version 2.20 Updated 7/1/2010

-11-

Appendix E

Bloor-Dovercourt Demonstration Project

PAVING STONE GRATE

Appendix B, Terms of Reference

PavingStone Grate II Descriptive Specifications 1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

5.0

6.0 7.0

.1 .2 .3 .1 .2 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .1 .2 .3 .4 .7 .8 .1 .1 .2 .3 .4

Dimensions

Height Width of PavingStone Grate Length of PavingStone Grate

‐ ‐ ‐

100mm 1300mm 1300mm

Formed Laser Cut and Welded Steel Components

All steel parts shall be of high grade material 300W min. requirement.

Welding materials: In accordance with CSA W48 Series

PavingStone Grate

9.5mm HR steel All butt joints to be welded continuously Height of inner vertical Flange ‐ Width of Grate ‐ Length of Grate ‐ Hot Dip Galvanize finish

100mm 1300mm 1300mm

Horizontal Plate

One component reinforced design Four (4) 100mm offset non threaded locate holes for securing plate component All butt joints to be welded continuously Holes to be spaced and aligned equally at corners Four (4) 9.5mm thick reinforcing members centered equally on each side of plate Hot Dip Galvanize finish

Vertical Flange

Galvanized High grade steel Flange total height ‐ 100mm Outside width of flange opening ‐ 620mm Width of flange inlet opening ‐ 600mm Four (4) vertical slotted holes centered for component mounting Hot Dip Galvanize finish

Base Plate Root Rain Inlet

Two (2) maximum 90mm holes for through mounting of RootRain System as required

Galvanization Preparation and Finishing

Sandblast all steel parts to remove any mill scale prior to galvanization.

Electroplate steel parts that would be injured when exposed to hot‐dipped galvanization Perform all galvanization operations in accordance with CAN/CSA – G164‐M92.

No drilling or threading operations to be performed after the galvanization.

STRIP DRAIN

ROOTRAIN LINEAR STRIP DRAIN II

Appendix B, Terms of Reference

RootRain Linear Drain Descriptive Specifications

1.0

Dimensions

.1 .2 .3

Height

Width of linear drain Length of linear drain

2.0

Formed Laser Cut and Welded Steel Components

.1 .2

All steel parts shall be of high grade material 300W min. requirement.

Welding materials: In accordance with CSA W48 Series

3.0

Linear Drain Trough

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6

14GA HR steel

All butt joints to be welded continuously Height of trough

‐ Width of trough

‐ Length of trough

‐ Hot Dip Galvanize finish

4.0

Horizontal Gusset

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5

14GA HR galvanized angles, continuous weld on ends Two (2) threaded holes to fit applicable thread size All butt joints to be welded continuously Horizontal Gusset to be spaced and aligned equally along the length Hot Dip Galvanize finish

5.0

Lid

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7

Galvanized High grade steel Lid height

‐ 6mm Outside width of lid

‐ 108mm Width of lid inlet openings

‐ 12mm Lid ribs detail

‐ 50 x 108mm spaced evenly apart Lid hardware 316 stainless steel counter sunk flat head Hex Drive screws.

Hot Dop Galvanize finish

6.0

Base Plate Root Rain Inlet

.1 .2

52mm reducing tabbed inlet with debris collector Vertical triangle pre‐screen for larger debris

7.0

Concrete Retaining Tab

.1

Five (5) 25mm x 100mm 14GA HR Galvanized tabs aligned on one lower edge of trough.

8.0

Galvanization Preparation and Finishing

.1 .2 .3 .4

Sandblast all steel parts to remove any mill scale prior to galvanization.

Electroplate steel parts that would be injured when exposed to hot‐dipped galvanization Perform all galvanization operations in accordance with CAN/CSA – G164‐M92.

No drilling or threading operations to be performed after the galvanization.

‐ ‐ ‐

76mm 108mm varies

70mm 108mm varies

Root Rain Linear Strip Drain

An installed RootRain Drain System should incorporate the following:

Correct grate type Correct channel type and size Minimum grade 3,000psi compressive strength cement concrete surround Strip drain units are installed in a continuous trench, and are fully encased with concrete.

1. Excavation: Excavate trench to accommodate trench drain system. Excavation should be made around the center line.

Excavation must be sufficient enough to accommodate each of the following:

Strip drain width and depth dimensions.

Concrete surround dimensions ‐ a minimum of 4” (Load Class A) of concrete on all sides, Specific loading and ground conditions will increase excavation size.

For sloped systems, excavate base to roughly follow fall of trench drain run.

Ensure all loose material is removed and base is compacted.

Run string line and laser level at finished surface level along full length of excavation to ensure trench is installed at correct grade.

2. Layout and outlet installation

All installations should start from the outlet point.

Determine type of outlet required and its position

Install the outlet channel/catch basin and set haunch

Select the numbered sloping channel units in order from deepest (highest channel number) to shallowest

Install channels working away from the outlet

3. Trench drain installation

Strip drain units need to be supported at correct height and held securely in place to avoid movement during concrete pour.

There are a number of options available to support Strip drain units.

Using a timber strap wide enough to span the trench position the strip drain to the correct height using a screw threaded in the gussets

Timber strap positioned and adjusted to the correct height for the strip drain

Trench over excavated to receive the linear strip drain and provide for sufficient volumes of concrete

Citygreen Urban Ltd 24 A Corydon Place Cambridge ON N1R7L5 I T: 1866 282 2743 I F: 519 623 7333 www.citygreen.com

Root Rain Linear Strip Drain

4. Strip bracing :

To prevent the channel walls being distorted by the pressure of concrete, grates should be installed in the channel.

The grates should be suitably wrapped to protect from concrete splash. Shims or spacers placed along each side allow easy removal of the grating.

5. Concrete pour:

Concrete should have minimum 3,000 psi compressive strength.

Concrete should be poured evenly (both sides of channel) and carefully to avoid dislodging channels. A wand/needle type vibrator should be used to ensure concrete distributes evenly underneath and around channels.

6. Pavement finishing :

The top of the adjacent pavement must be above the grating level by approximately 1/8" (3 mm).

Brick pavers should be set slightly above the trench edge. First brick course should be set on

mortar/concrete.

Care should be taken with asphalt rolling machines to avoid damage to trench edge.

7. Completing trench installation:

i Remove grates and remove protective wrapping. ii Remove debris from trench drain and make sure outlet pipes are clear. iii Install debris buckets in catch basins, if required. iv Flush trench run to check for pipe work blockages. Unblock if necessary. v Empty debris buckets and clean out pipe connections, if necessary. Re‐install trash buckets.

Re‐install grates in proper position ensuring they are securely fastened down.

The RootRain linear trench drain is now ready for use.

8. Maintenance:

Regular inspections of the RootRain trench drains are recommended. Frequency will depend on local conditions and environment, but should be at least annually.

Inspections should cover: • Grates and locking devices • Catch basins and trash buckets • Concrete surround and adjacent paving

All items should be inspected for damage, blockage or movement. Compare with site drawings if necessary.

Citygreen Urban Ltd 24 A Corydon Place Cambridge ON N1R7L5 I T: 1866 282 2743 I F: 519 623 7333 www.citygreen.com

Root Rain Linear Strip Drain

Maintenance Guidelines: i ii iii iv v vi vii

Remove grates Remove debris from channel Flush channels with water or high pressure washer (do not use boiling water or aggressive cleaning agents) Repair damaged surfaces where necessary with an appropriate repair kit Renew joint seals as required Empty debris buckets and clean out pipe connections, if necessary. Re‐install trash buckets.

Re‐install grates in proper position ensuring they are securely back in place

Citygreen Urban Ltd 24 A Corydon Place Cambridge ON N1R7L5 I T: 1866 282 2743 I F: 519 623 7333 www.citygreen.com

50 Park Road Toronto, Ontario M4W 2N5 T 416 968 9479 F 416 968 0687 www.dtah.com